Pioneer DVR-450H-S Operating Instructions
<VRB1463-A> Pr inted in China HDD/DVD Recorder DVR-650H-S DVR-550H-S DVR-450H-S Operating Instructions HDD/D VD RECORDER Operating Instructions P ublished by Pioneer Corporation . Copyright é 2007 P ioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En TM 00 Cover_back_TLTFWPW_EN.fm 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the rear of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit D3-4-2-1-8_B_En CAUTION A TTENTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RA DI A TION WH EN OPE N, A VOI D E XPO SU RE T O T HE B EA M. VRW2262 - A RADIA TIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES D E CLAS SE 3B QU AND OU VERT . ÃÂV I TE Z TOUT EXPOSITION AU F AISCEAU. ADV ARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LA SERSTRàLING VED àBNING. UN DGàUDSÃÂTTELSE FOR STRàLING. V ARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OC H OSYNLIG LA SER ST RàLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR ÃÂPPNAD. UNDVIK AT T U T S àT TA DIG FÃÂR STRàLEN. V ARO! AVA TT AESSA OLET A L TTIINA NÃÂKYVÃÂLLE JA NÃÂKYMÃÂTTÃÂMÃÂLLE LUO KAN 3 B L ASERS àTEIL YLLE. ÃÂLàKA TSO S àTEESEEN. PRECAUCIÃÂN CUANDO SE ABRE HA Y RADIACIÃÂN LÃÂSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E I N V I S I B L E . E V I T E LA E X P O S I C I àN A LOS R AY O S L ÃÂSER. VORSICHT BEI GEÃÂFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SI CH TB AR E UND U NS I C HT BARE LAS ERST RAH LUN G DE R K LA SS E 3 B IM GE RàTEINNEREN V ORH AND EN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZE N! W ARNING To prevent a fire hazar d, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
CAUTION The ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En For T aiwan exclusively T aiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents 01 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 12 Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13 02 Connections Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Using other types of video output . . . . . . 17 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 04 Getting started Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 30 05 Recording About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . 35 Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Setting the picture quality/ recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . 38 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . 50 DVD-RW Auto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 06 Playback Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . 58 The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . 60 Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DVR650HK_TLT_ENTOC.fm 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En 07 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 64 Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . 64 About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 08 Editing Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 09 Copying and backup Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 10 Using the Jukebox Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Copying files via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . 90 Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 11 The PhotoViewer Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Reloading files from a disc or USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Selecting multiple files or folders . . . . . . 95 Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . 96 Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 12 The Disc Setup menu Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 13 The Video Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 14 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 106 Selecting other languages for language options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 15 Additional information Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Front-panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 132 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 DVR650HK_TLT_ENTOC.fm 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it: ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 ⢠Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) ⢠RF antenna cable ⢠Power cable ⢠These operating instructions Putting the batteries in the remote control ⢠Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. Important Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of batteries together â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 116. ⢠Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the front panel, as shown. WA RNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater . This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or per formance of batteries. D3-4-2-3-3_En 7 m DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 7 En 01 ⢠You can control this recorder using the remote sensor of another Pioneer component via the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connections on page 14 for more information. Disc/content format playback compatibility Compatible media ⢠DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 6x ⢠DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x ⢠DVD RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x ⢠DVD R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x ⢠DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x ⢠DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x ⢠DVD R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs. The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recordersâ limited compatibility with DVD- RW ver. 1.2 discs. *1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. *2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. *3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. Readable file system This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the following file systems 1 : ISO 9660*, UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01. * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. Model Playable Recordable DVR-7000 Yes *1,2,3 No DVR-310 DVR-510H Yes *1 No Note 1⢠Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly. ⢠MP3/WMA files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video files and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or ISO 9660 file systems. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types. Notes to table *1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 101). *2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 101). *3 Erasable, but free space does not increase. *4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing. *5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback. *6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units) (page 49). *7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback. *8 Must be compatible with DVD RW playback. *9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback. *10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (page 113). *11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM. *12 CPRM-compatible discs only. *13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited. *14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor increase the number of recordable titles left. *15 Must be compatible with DVD R playback. *16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be recorded (page 101). In this case, initialization will take about an hour. is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. HDD DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD- RAM Marks used in this manual *1 *1 *2 *13, 16 Logos Re-recordable/ Erasable î *3 *3 î î *3 î *14 î Editing of recorded programmes î î î *4 î î *4 î *4 î *4 î Recording of Copy- once protected material î î *12 î *12 î *12 Playback in other players/recorders n/a *5 î *6 *7 î *6 î *6, 15 î *8 î *9 Chase play î 16:9 and 4:3 programme recording î î î î Dual mono/ Bilingual broadcast recording of both audio channels î *10, 11 î *11 î *11 î *11 HDD DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 9 En 01 Using DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD R DL (Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable layers on a single side, giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a conventional single-layer disc. This unit can record to both DVD-R DL and DVD R DL discs. ⢠If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or DVD R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that some DVD recorders/players may not play even finalized DL discs.) ⢠This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc: Correct operation has been confirmed for DL discs: ⢠DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) ⢠DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) ThatâÂÂs JVC ⢠DVD R DL 2.4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) RICOH ⢠DVD R DL 2.4x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) RICOH About DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content âÂÂvideo, audio, etc. âÂÂwhile the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play. It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable. The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. Other disc compatibility In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an unplayable format â see below for further compatibility information. CD-R/-RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/ Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. ⢠Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD- Audio and Video CD/Super VCD) ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible media: DVD-ROM, DVD-R/-RW, DVD R/ RW, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only : USB ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW Super Video CD (Super VCD) DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En ⢠Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) ⢠Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes ⢠VBR WMA playback: No ⢠WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) 1 file playback: No ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: Up to 99 folders/999 files (if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable) WMA (Windows Media⢠Audio) compatibility This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media Player for Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series. Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. DivX video compatibility DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX î video codec from DivX, Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. ⢠Official DivX î Certified product. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder. ⢠File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. Note 1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 11 En 01 DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for this recorder, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play. ⢠Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the recorder on page 134) will not cause you to lose your registration code. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files * File format used by digital still cameras ⢠Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0 ⢠Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels ⢠Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Dolby Digital Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Outâ are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. DivX DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 12 En About the internal hard disk drive The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment. When used without the proper care or in the wrong conditions, it is possible that recorded contents may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making even normal playback or recording impossible. Please understand that in the event of repair or replacement of the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings will be lost. Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure. The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect against accidental loss. Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from HDD failure. ⢠Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface. ⢠Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan. ⢠Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure. ⢠Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below: 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the front panel display, wait at least two minutes. 2 Unplug from the wall socket. 3 Move the recorder. ⢠If thereâÂÂs a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost. ⢠The HDD is very delicate. If used over time in an improper manner or in an unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will be possible. In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit. Optimizing HDD performance As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the recorderâÂÂs performance. Before this happens, the recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD (which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on page 101). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 13 En 01 Symbols used in this manual The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc. HDD Any type of DVD disc (recordable or playback only), finalized or not. Commercially produced DVD, finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW. Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized) VR mode DVD-R/-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM Audio CD Video CD Super VCD WMA or MP3 files DivX files All of the above HDD DVD DVD-Video DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 DivX A L L DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 14 En Chapter 2 Connections Rear panel connections 1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV. 2 INPUT 3 Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for connection to a satellite receiver, set top box, etc. 3 OUTPUT 2 Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 4 HDMI OUT HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video. 5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder or other equipment with a digital input. 6 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for connection to a satellite receiver, set top box, etc. 7 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input. 8 OUTPUT 1 Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 9 CONTROL IN Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the Pioneer î mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini- plug cord. 10 AC IN â Power inlet Connect to a power outlet using the supplied power cable after making all other connections. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CO NTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 1 2 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 15 En 02 Front panel connections On the front panel there is a flip-down cover that hides more connections. Left side: 11 DV IN A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a DV camcorder. 12 USB port (Type B) (DVR-650H-S, DVR-550H-S only) USB port for connecting a PictBridge- compatible printer or PC. 13 USB port (Type A) (DVR-650H-S, DVR-550H-S only) USB port for connecting a digital camera, keyboard or other USB device. Right side: 14 INPUT 2 Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and S-video), especially suitable for camcorders, game consoles, portable audio, etc. USB DV IN 11 12 13 INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO 14 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 16 En Easy connections The setup described here is a basic configuration that allows you to record TV programmes on both this recorder and your VCR. When watching recordings from this recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to input 2 to watch a video playing in the VCR. Important ⢠This recorder is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your VCR via this recorder) using AV cables, as the picture from this recorder will not appear properly on your TV. ⢠Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. 1 Connect your TV antenna/cable TV outlet to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on this recorder. 2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to connect the ANTENNA OUT jack on this recorder to the antenna input on your VCR. ⢠If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect this recorder directly to your TV and skip the next step. 3 Use an RF antenna cable to connect the antenna output on your VCR to the antenna input on your TV. 4 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of audio/ video inputs on your TV. Use the supplied three-pin audio/video cable. It is colour-coded to help you match them up (red/white for the right/left audio connections and yellow for video in/outs). Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. 5 Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V IN 2 above) using a set of audio and video cables. ⢠See the following page if you want to use S-video or component video cables for the video connection. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CONT ROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 TV Antenna/cable TV wall outlet VCR ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 2 OUTPUT 1 3 5 4 To antenna input To antenna input From antenna output To audio/video input To audio/ video input From audio/ video output DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 17 En 02 Using other types of video output This recorder has standard (composite), S-video and component video outputs. The main difference between them is the quality of the picture. S-video delivers a better picture than composite video, while component video gives better picture quality still. The variety of outputs also gives you the flexibility of connecting your particular equipment using the best connection type available. 1 Connecting using an S-video output S-video carries the picture as separate colour and luminance (brightness) signals. There are two S-video outputs for connection to TVs, monitors, VCRs or other equipment. ⢠Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect an S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). 2 Connecting using the component video output Component video carries the picture as two separate colour signals, plus a luminance (brightness) signal. See also Component Video Out on page 108 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scan- compatible TV. ⢠Use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). TV AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CONT ROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 1 2 S-VIDEO OUTPUT To component video input To S-video input DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 18 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) If you are using a cable box or satellite receiver with only a few scrambled channels, follow the setup on this page 1 . If many or all the channels are scrambled, we recommend using the setup on the following page. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record unscrambled channels by selecting them on this recorder. ⢠Record scrambled channels by selecting them on the cable box/satellite receiver and using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 48). ⢠Watch one channel while recording another. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch the output from this recorder. 3 Connect the audio/video output of your cable box/satellite receiver to the INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note 1 The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CO NTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 TV Antenna/cable TV wall outlet Cable box/ Sat ellite receiver ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC 1 2 3 To antenna input To antenna input From antenna output To audio/video input From audio/ video output DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 19 En 02 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) If many or all the channels you receive by cable or satellite are scrambled, we recommend using this setup. 1 Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite receiver. ⢠Record using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 48). Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch discs. 3 Connect the audio/video output of your cable box/satellite receiver to the INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note 1 ⢠The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another. ⢠The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONT ROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COMP ONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 TV Antenna/cable TV wall outlet Cable box/ Sat ellite receiver ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC 2 3 To antenna input To antenna input From antenna output To audio/video input From audio/ video output DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 20 En Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amp/ receiver using the digital coaxial output. In addition to the digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amp/receiver. Use the standard (composite) video output (as shown here), or the S-video or component video connections. See also Audio Out on page 109 for how to set up the digital audio output. (Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amp/ receiver.) Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder to your TV âÂÂthroughâ your VCR or other component using A/V cables. Always connect it directly to your TV. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your AV amp/receiver. 3 Use an coaxial digital audio cable (not supplied) to connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack on this recorder to an coaxial digital input on your AV amp/ receiver. This enables you to listen to multichannel surround sound. 1 4 Connect the AV amp/receiverâÂÂs video output to a video input on your TV. Note 1 If your AV amp/receiver doesnâÂÂt have an coaxial digital input, but has a optical type, converter boxes that convert from coaxial to optical are available at specialist audio dealers. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COA XIAL HDMI OUT CO NTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AU TO START REC INPUT 3 TV Antenna/cable TV wall outlet AV a mp/ receiver ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 3 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 2 4 To antenna input To audio/video input T o digital input To video input From video output DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 21 En 02 Connecting using HDMI If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped 1 monitor or display 2 , you can connect it to this recorder using an HDMI cable (not supplied). The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio. 1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on an HDMI- compatible display. ⢠The arrow on the cable connector body should be face down for correct alignment with the connector on the recorder. When connected to an HDMI component or HDCP-compatible DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights. HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) on page 114 for more information. Note that the HDMI settings remain in effect until you change them, or connect a new HDMI component. Important ⢠An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP connection, however, does not support audio. Consult your local audio dealer for more information. ⢠The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/ 20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio bitstream. ⢠If your connected component is only compatible with Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is not output). ⢠If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma display, please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to the supplied manual for more on this). About HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. Note 1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. 2 The pixel resolution of this recorderâÂÂs HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced. AC IN DIGITAL AUDI O OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CONT ROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 C OMPONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 HDMI OUT To HDMI input HDMI-compatible display DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 22 En HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround- sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigabits per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC. HDMI Control By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television or AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.) with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected plasma television, as well as have the connected plasma television automatically change inputs in response to this unit starting playback. Refer to the operating manual for your plasma television or AV system for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable. Auto-select function You can have a connected plasma television or AV system automatically change inputs when playback begins on this unit (including when you have a GUI (such as Disc Navigator) set to display on this unit). Certain connected plasma televisions may have their power turned from off to on when using this function. Simultaneous power function You can have this unit turn on automatically when the power for a connected plasma television is turned on. To have this unitâÂÂs power turned off when a connected plasma television is turned off, you must change the simultaneous power function of your plasma television. Unified language function By receiving language information from a connected plasma television, you can have this unitâÂÂs language settings automatically change to those of the plasma television (language information can be received only when no media is being played back and no recordings are taking place, or when you choose not to display this unitâÂÂs GUI displays). Refer to your plasma televisionâÂÂs operating manual for more information regarding how your plasma television transmits language information. Setup Navigator Language information is imported from your plasma television before you begin Setup Navigator (see Switching on and setting up on page 30). Important ⢠Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, change connection settings, turn this unitâÂÂs power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected component. If you experience any problems, turn the HDMI control for all connected units ON and check the video output from this unit. ⢠You cannot use the Auto Start Recording function (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 48) if you have this unitâÂÂs power set to turn on simultaneously with a plasma television. If you do not want this unit to turn on automatically when you turn the power to your plasma television, set this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control to OFF (page 115). ⢠When a scheduled recording finishes, this unitâÂÂs power is not turned off if the power for the plasma television is on. ⢠Even if you make Child Lock settings (see Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) on page 46), this unit can still be controlled by the remote of a connected plasma 02 Connecting _Up_EU.fm 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 23 En 02 television. If you do not want this unit to be able to be controlled by another component when you have set a Child Lock, turn this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control to OFF (page 115). ⢠We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI control-compatible components other than those made by Pioneer. Connecting other AV sources Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder 1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. 2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. ⢠The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder input. ⢠When connecting an external AV source that only supports monaural sound, only insert the left (white) audio jack to this device. Doing so will allow the same sound track to be recorded to both channels. You must connect to the INPUT 2 jack on the front panel. Connecting a DV camcorder You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with DV output to the front panel DV IN jack. Important ⢠This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video decks. ⢠Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV IN jack of this recorder. Analog camcorder HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) R AU DIO REC VCR (Rear panel) AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT (Front panel) AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT 1 2 From audio/video output To audio/video input DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DV camcorder HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) R AUDI O REC From DV output DV IN DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 24 En Connecting a USB device (DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only) Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can connect USB devices such as digital cameras, printers, keyboards and PCs. Please also see the instructions that came with the device you want to connect before using. Important ⢠Some USB devices may not work with this recorder. ⢠When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the power is turned off on both the PC and this unit when you connect them via USB. ⢠We recommend connecting USB devices when this recorder is switched off (in standby). JPEG file storage devices ⢠Digital still camera ⢠Memory card reader (any type of memory card) ⢠USB memory The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it. The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to transfer up to maximum 4000 files. WMA/MP3 file storage devices ⢠Memory card reader (any type of memory card) ⢠USB memory ⢠PC (Use Connect PC function) The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it. Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used, the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To read another card, remove all the cards and insert the card to be read again. Using a USB hub ⢠Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/ or 2.0. ⢠Use an independently powered hub (bus powered hubs may not work reliably). ⢠In the event of unreliable operation with the hub, we recommend plugging the device directly into the recorderâÂÂs USB port. ⢠Operation may become unreliable if too many devices are connected to the hub. In this case, try unplugging some devices. ⢠If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for the devices connected, communication can become unreliable. In this case, disconnect one or more devices then perform a USB restart. (See Restart USB Device on page 116.) Using a USB printer ⢠Use a PictBridge-compatible printer. Using a USB keyboard ⢠Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2-USB adapter. Digital Camera HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) R AU DIO REC Keyboard USB (T ype B) PictBridge-compatible Printer USB USB USB (T ype A) PC DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 25 En 02 Using a PC ⢠Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB to copy WMA and MP3 files. For more information, see Connect PC on page 88. To use Connect PC with this device, your PC must run either the Windows XP Home Edition (SP2) or Windows XP Professional (SP2) operating system and be able to run Windows Media Player 10. Even if your PC can run Windows Media Player 10, we cannot guarantee that it will function properly with this device. For more details see the âÂÂHelpâ section of Windows Media Player 10. Plugging in After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder. ⢠Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 26 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 DivX indicator Lights when this recorder plays DivX video files. 2 HDD/DVD Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and playback. 3 COPY indicator Lights when copying is underway. 4 Disc tray 5 HDD/DVD indicator Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected. 6 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 7 HDMI indicator Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI (HDCP) compatible component. 8 Front panel display and IR remote sensor See Display on page 27 for details. 9 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 10 Front panel inputs See Front panel connections on page 15 for more information on these. 11 î Press to start or restart playback. î Press to stop playback. î STOP REC Press to stop recording. ONE TOUCH COPY Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. CH /â Use to change channels, skip chapters/ tracks, etc. INPUT SELECT Press to change the input used for recording. REC MODE Press repeatedly to cycle through recording modes (picture quality). 12 î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in 30 minute blocks. HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) R AU DI O REC 8 4 6 1 7 3 2 5 12 10 9 10 11 DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 27 En 03 Display 1 î Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused. 2 î Lights when copying. 3 î Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused. 4P M Lights to indicate PM (after midday) for the clock display. 5 (page 39) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but there isnâÂÂt a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.) NTSC Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC. (page 109) Taiwan and Philippines model: Indicates which channels are recorded when dual mono is selected. Other: Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. (page 108) Lights when the component video output is set to progressive scan (except in some cases when a component is connected using HDMI). SAP (page 36) ( Taiwan and Philippines model only ) Lights when the currently selected TV channel has a Secondary Audio Programme channel. 6 Recording quality indicators (page 37) XP Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best quality). SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). LP/SLP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play) or SLP (super long play). EP/SEP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play) or SEP (super extended play). MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode. 7 Character display 8 R/RW Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or DVD-RW. 9 AUTO Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and during Auto Start Recording. 10 PL (page 68) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 2 3 (page 116) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. P R L 8 9 7 2 3 5 6 1 10 PM 4 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 28 En Remote control 1 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 79) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 2 Remote control indicator Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a TV (page 130) and when setting the remote control mode (page 116). 3 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 4 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 5 HDD Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or playback. 6 DVD Press to select the DVD for recording or playback. 7 INPUT SELECT (page 47) Press to change the input to use for recording. 8 Alphanumeric buttons, and CLEAR Use the number buttons for track/chapter/ title selection; channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on. Use the button to enter non-alphanumeric characters and symbols. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. 9 CH /â (page 36) Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 10 G-Code⢠(page 41) Press then use the number buttons to enter a G-Code programming number for timer recording. G-Code is a trademark of Gemstar Development Corporation. The G-Code system is manufactured under license from Gemstar Development Corporation. 11 DVD playback functions AUDIO (page 36, 61) Changes the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) SUBTITLE (page 60) Displays/changes the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ANGLE (page 62) Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes. 12 PLAY MODE (page 58) Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such as search, repeat and programme play). HDD/DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH COPY OPEN/CLOSE TOP MENU RETURN DISC NAVIGA TOR MENU HOME MENU CASE SELECTION INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT ABC AUDIO HDD DVD SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE HELP DISPLAY DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL CH CHANNEL VOLUME REC PREV PA USE STOP CM OK BACK SKIP REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN NEXT STEP/SLOW STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC î î î î î î G -CODE 1 2 4 12 9 14 17 3 5 13 15 16 20 21 22 11 6 7 18 19 8 10 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 29 En 03 13 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 56, 68) / TOP MENU (page 53) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded. 14 MENU (page 53) Press to display the disc menu if a DVD- Video disc is loaded. 15 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î and ENTER Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 16 HOME MENU Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 17 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. 18 HELP Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen. 19 DISPLAY (page 62) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. 20 Playback controls (page 52) î REV SCAN î FWD SCAN (page 57) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. î PLAY Press to start playback. î PAUSE Press to pause playback or recording. î STOP Press to stop playback. CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the video playing. CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the video playing. î PREV î NEXT Press to skip to the previous or next title/ chapter/track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. î î STEP/SLOW (page 57) During playback, press to start slow- motion playback; while paused, press to show the previous or next video frame. 21 Recording controls (page 38) î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. î STOP REC Press to stop recording. REC MODE (page 37) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). TIMER REC (page 39) Press to start setting a timer recording. 22 TV CONTROL (page 130) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 30 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on and setting up When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output. If youâÂÂre using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder. Important ⢠Some of the Setup Navigator on-screen displays (OSDs) in this section vary slightly depending on the country or region of purchase. ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. 2 Switch on the recorder. When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup Navigator doesnâÂÂt appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 106). 3 Choose a language (then press ENTER). 4 Start the Setup Navigator. ⢠If you donâÂÂt want to use the Setup Navigator, press î to select Cancel , then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. 5 Select an option then press ENTER. Taiwan and Philippines model: Other: ⢠Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example). ⢠You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN . ⢠Select your country. î STANDBY/ON ENTER English Español Language Italiano Português ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Start Cancel Start Complete this setup before you start using your recorder . Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Channel Setting English Cable Do not Set Antenna k Setting Line System e r Save P Auto Channel Setting English Do not Set Auto Scan ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save k Setting t Line System e r Save P Country Selection Country Singapore DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 31 En 04 ⢠Auto-tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets. 6 Select âÂÂAutoâ for automatic time setting, or âÂÂManualâ to set the clock manually. ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the programme. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER . The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that itâÂÂs set, select Next to proceed. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. Press î then use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOffâ for daylight saving/summer time, then press ENTER. Select On if you are currently using daylight saving/summer time. Set the date and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Taiwan and Philippines model: The date is in month/day/year format. Other: The date is in day/month/year format. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to move from one field to another. ⢠Press ENTER to finish setting the time. Tu n ing 32/68 Cancel ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P Clock Setting Auto Manual Auto k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date Time Clock Set CH âÂÂâ / âÂÂâ / âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ âÂÂâ : âÂÂâ AM 2 Start k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH 1 / 01 / 2007 MON 12 : 00 AM 2 Start Next k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone D.S.T Off Singapore Singapore 1/2 k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone D.S.T On Singapore Singapore 1/2 k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting Date T ime T ime Zone D.S.T On Singapore Singapore 1/ / 01 12 : 00 AM 2007 MON 2/2 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 32 En 7 Select the TV screen type, âÂÂWide (16:9)â or âÂÂStandard (4:3)âÂÂ. 8 Select whether or not your TV is compatible with progressive scan video. ⢠Note that progressive scan video is only output through the component video outputs and only when the video source is NTSC (see Using other types of video output on page 17). 9 Press to continue after reading the HDD caution. 10 Select âÂÂFinish Setupâ to exit the Setup Navigator, or âÂÂGo Backâ if you want to start again. That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. ⢠If there are blank channels with no station, you can set these to skip using the manual channel setting. See Manual CH Setting on page 107. ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator TV Screen Size Wide (16:9) Standard (4:3) ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Progressive Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Not Compatible ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator In the event of HDD failure, recordings may be lost or normal playback/recording may not be possible. As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD failure, we recommend to use the HDD only as temporary storage media. Please copy recordings you want to keep to recordable DVD. Press ENTER to continue. ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save p Navigator p Navigator Setup is complete! Finish Setup Go Back Finish Setup DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 33 En 05 Chapter 5 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD- RW, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD R DL media. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends on what you want to do with the recording which mode you choose. If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way, VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying, and changing the way the video is presented. Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard DVD players (many of which wonâÂÂt play VR mode discs 1 ). Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all recording on that disc will be in that mode. DVD RW discs can be initialized for VR mode recording. DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording. DVD R discs do not require initializing. Important The table below shows the maximum number of titles recordable per disc and the maximum number of chapters per title: *1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc. *2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc. ⢠This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD R discs recorded on another recorder. DVD RW discs recorded on another recorder are playable on this recorder but are not recordable. ⢠The maximum continuous recording time for one title is eight hours when using a DVD R/ RW disc. ⢠If you delete a title from a DVD R/ RW disc, the total number of recordable titles remaining may not increase. ⢠Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you canâÂÂt mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117. Note 1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. Disc type/rec. format Max. titles (per disc) Max. chapters (per title) DVD-R/-RW Video mode 99 99 DVD-R/-RW/-RAM VR mode 99 999 *1 DVD R/ RW 49 99 *2 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 34 En ⢠If power to the recorder is cut (due to a power outage, the plug being pulled from the power outlet, etc.) during recording, editing, initializing, finalizing or other operation, some recorded material on the disc, or the disc itself, may become unusable. In this case, try re-initializing the disc (DVD-RW only), or use a new disc. Pioneer is not responsible for lost recordings, damaged discs or other losses in these cases. ⢠Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs. ⢠Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder. ⢠See also Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc compatibility information. Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs is generally the same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however, please note the following points: ⢠When the recorder switches from the first layer to the second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new title is automatically started on the new layer. ⢠Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when the layer is switched, recording will stop. ⢠Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD R DL disc. ⢠You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc that has been recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD recorder. About HDD recording Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality options, including manual mode, and of course you can record, erase and re-record as many times as you like. The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it, even using the higher quality recording modes. Important ⢠The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached. ⢠The maximum continuous recording time for one title is 12 hours. ⢠It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting (page 117) matches the TV line system of the source youâÂÂre recording. HDD Video mode compatibility When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see page 113). Taiwan and Philippines model: When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW is possible. When recording a broadcast with a Secondary Audio Programme (SAP) channel, set which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup menu (see Dual Mono Recording on page 109). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 35 En 05 When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW isnâÂÂt possible. However, when SAP is selected as the broadcast audio channel, both the main and SAP channels are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback. Other: When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW is possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 109). When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW isnâÂÂt possible. However, both channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback. Recorded audio In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible) . When set to LPCM , sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. Taiwan and Philippines model: If the broadcast audio has a SAP channel and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/ -RW, DVD R/ RW, or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting, use the AUDIO button to select the Mono , Stereo or SAP audio channel to record before recording starts. In other cases, if SAP is selected then both the main and SAP audio channels will be recorded and you can switch on playback. The table below shows the different audio output possibilities: Other: If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/-RW, DVD R/ RW, or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 109) to select the A/ L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on playback. Restrictions on video recording You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen. Video that is âÂÂcopy-once onlyâ can only be recorded to DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM- compatible VR mode DVD-R/-RW (see below). When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 62). Audio setting Audio output Left (L) Right (R) MONO L R L R STEREO LR SAP L R SAP DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 36 En CPRM CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed for the recording of âÂÂcopy onceâ broadcast programmes. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media . This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM- compatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Using the built-in TV tuner There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note that you canâÂÂt change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby. ⢠CH /â buttons ⢠Number buttons For example, to select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER ; for channel 34, press 3 , 4 , ENTER . 1 ⢠CH /â buttons on the front panel Changing audio channels Taiwan and Philippines model: Some TV programmes are broadcast with both a main and a Secondary Audio Programme (SAP). You can change the TV audio using the AUDIO button. ⢠Press to change the audio type. The current audio channel is displayed on- screen. ⢠If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP channel being broadcast, you will still hear the main audio channel. ⢠If the sound is poor quality when set to Stereo , you can often improve it by changing to Mono . Note 1⢠Taiwan and Philippines model: Antenna channels are numbered 2 through 69. Cable channels are numbered 1 through 125. ⢠Other: Channel presets are numbered 1 through 99. CH ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR AUDIO Mono SAP St ereo DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 37 En 05 Note ⢠When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a dual mono broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Dual Mono Recording setting (see Dual Mono Recording on page 109). Other: You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal. ⢠Press to change the audio type. The current audio channel is displayed on- screen. ⢠If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 108) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. ⢠If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language. ⢠You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast. ⢠When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 108), you can switch the audio channel between left ( L ), right ( R ) or both ( L R ). Note ⢠When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 109). Setting the picture quality/ recording time Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual Recording on page 112), a further option will be available ( MN1 to MN32 , LPCM , or XP (a super-high quality HDD recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15 Mbps) depending on what you set). When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording quality available. If you select XP , the recording mode will automatically revert to MN32 . When recording to DVD R/ RW, SLP is the longest recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to MN3 , the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP . ⢠Press repeatedly to select the recording quality. ⢠XP â High quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠SP (Standard Play) â Default quality, used for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD. AUDIO NICAM Regular NICAM A NICAM B Regular NICAM A B A (L) B (R) A B (L R) LR L R DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD REC MODE DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 38 En ⢠LP (Long Play) â Lower video quality than SP, but doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four hours. ⢠EP (Extended Play) â Lower quality than LP, but gives about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠SLP (Super Long Play) â Lower quality than EP, but gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠SEP (Super Extended Play) â Lowest video quality but gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠MN1 to MN32 / LPCM 1 / XP 2 â Manual/ Linear PCM/XP (available only when manual recording is on). The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 115) is Off then this information is not displayed.) Basic recording from the TV Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the channel to record, choosing whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality. 1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. ⢠If youâÂÂre recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc). ⢠If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 50). 2 Select a TV channel to record. The front panel display shows the channel number: ⢠While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel (e.g., for channel 24, press 2 , 4 then ENTER ). ⢠If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the CH /â buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. 3 Set the picture quality/recording time. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 37 for detailed instructions. 4 Select the audio channel to record. See Changing audio channels on page 36 for more on this. Taiwan and Philippines model: ⢠When recording in VR mode (DVD) or with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (HDD), both mono and SAP audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. Note 1⢠Taiwan and Philippines model: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a broadcast with a SAP channel, select which audio channel to record (see Dual Mono Recording on page 109). ⢠Other: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 109). 2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP recordings are always copied in real time. DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD HDD DVD CH Channel number ch REC MODE AUDIO DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 39 En 05 Other: ⢠When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. 5 Start recording. If you want to set a recording end time, press the î REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. ⢠To cancel the set recording time, press î REC . ⢠If you want to pause recording at any time 1 , press î PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording (If recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts). 6 Press to stop recording. ⢠If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing î STOP REC . ⢠Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/ DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). Setting a timer recording Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programmes can be set to record just once, every day, or every week. There are three ways to set a timer recording; using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see Easy Timer Recording on page 40), using the G-Code programming system (see Timer recording using the G-Code⢠programming system on page 41), or using manual timer recording (see Setting a manual timer recording on page 43). You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD). You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you donâÂÂt need to keep, you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recording made on that timer programme will be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 112 for more on this). Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isnâÂÂt a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording, the Recovery Recording feature will automatically record the programme to the HDD for you. Note 1 Except during Chase Play. REC î STOP RE C DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 40 En Important â¢A timer recording canâÂÂt be set if there are already 32 timer programmes waiting to be recorded. ⢠Timer recording will not start if: â The recorder is already recording. â A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. ⢠Timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished. ⢠When the front panel display is set to ON, the timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable). ⢠Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions. ⢠The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title (HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12 hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles. ⢠When a scheduled recording finishes, this unitâÂÂs power is not turned off if the power for the plasma television is on. If you want this unitâÂÂs power to turn off after a timer recording finishes, set the HDMI Contro l to Off (page 115). Easy Timer Recording As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes setting up a timer recording as simple as possible. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. 1 Select âÂÂTimer RecordingâÂÂ, then âÂÂEasy Timerâ from the Home Menu . 2 Set the TV channel to record. 3 Set the recording quality. ⢠DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. ⢠HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank DVD disc. 4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 5 Move the cursor to the recording start date and time on the grid. ⢠You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at a time using the î REV SCAN and î FWD SCAN buttons. HOME MENU PREV NEXT AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 9:30 SP REC MODE 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 AM â âÂÂâÂÂ:âÂÂâ 1/01 1/02 1/03 HDD HDD/DVD îÂÂî REC MODE HDD DVD AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 11:45 SP REC MODE 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 AM â âÂÂâÂÂ:âÂÂâ 1/01 1/02 1/03 îÂÂî Current time Recording start time HDD HDD/DVD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 41 En 05 Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is a 15 minute interval. The darker area represents time that has already passed and canâÂÂt therefore be selected. The lighter area is time thatâÂÂs available. 6 Set the start time. The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the screen. ⢠You can go back and reset the start time if you need to by pressing RETURN . 7 Move the cursor to the recording end time on the grid. As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow stretches from the start time to the current cursor position, representing the length of the recording. A recording of up to six hours can be set. 8 Set the end time. 9 Select âÂÂYesâ to set the timer recording and exit, or âÂÂNoâ to go back to the Easy Timer Recording screen. ⢠You can check the timer recording details you just set from the main timer recording screen (see Setting a manual timer recording on page 43). Timer recording using the G-Code ⢠programming system This system makes programming timer recordings very simple. Most TV guides publish G-Code programming numbers with their programme details. If you want to make a timer recording of a programme, you just input the corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell the recorder the recording mode, and whether itâÂÂs a once-only recording or a regular recording. Note that if the country setting is incorrect (set in the Setup Navigator), timer recordings made using the G-Code programming system may not work as expected. 1 Press âÂÂG-Codeâ to display the G-Code programme screen. You can also access this screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then G-Code system ). ⢠Use the number buttons to enter the G-Code programming number. (To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR .) ⢠You can also use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î buttons to select digits from the on- screen display. 2 After making the settings, select âÂÂEnterâ and press ENTER . The timer recording screen appears with the timer programme you just set. ENTER AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 11:45 SP REC MODE 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00 5:00 AM â 1:45 PM 1/01 1/02 1/03 îÂÂî Recording start time Recording end time HDD HDD/DVD ENTER G-Code# 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Clear Enter Details Cancel 2 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 42 En 3 Confirm that the settings are correct. If the channel number isnâÂÂt displayed, use the îÂÂ/î buttons to highlight CH , then use the îÂÂ/î buttons to set the correct channel number. ⢠If the channel number is set, but incorrectly, set up the guide channel (see G-Code CH Setting on page 107). 4 Select âÂÂStore Programmeâ to finish. ⢠Other options in the same menu panel allow you to name the programme, and change the recording destination and/or recording mode. Checking/editing timer recording settings You can check and/or edit the timer recording settings made by the G-Code system by selecting Details from the G-Code# setting screen. 1 Select âÂÂDetailsâ from the G-Code# setting screen. The Timer Programme Set screen appears, filled out with the timer recording details. 2 Check and edit the fields as necessary. See Setting a manual timer recording on page 43 for more on this. 3 Select âÂÂStore Programmeâ to save the timer programme and exit. G-Code programming with the power off You can enter a G-Code programming number when the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc, youâÂÂll need to switch on the power and use the full G-Code programme screen. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature until you have set up the guide channels. see G-Code CH Setting on page 107. ⢠You canâÂÂt change the recording mode. ⢠You canâÂÂt program daily or weekly timer recordings. 1 Press âÂÂG-CodeâÂÂ. The front panel display shows the current recording mode and prompts you to enter the G-Code programming number. 2 Use the number buttons to enter the number. ⢠To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR . 3 Press ENTER. The display shows the timer settings: Date î Start time î End time î HDD and Recording channel î Recording mode ⢠If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that the number is correct and that the guide channel is set (see G-Code CH Setting on page 107), then set the timer recording again. ⢠If CANâÂÂT SET appears in the display, it means that although you entered a valid number, the programme has already finished. ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 43 En 05 Setting a manual timer recording The timer recording screen you can see all the timer programmes already set, clear programmes and set up new ones. 1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording ). This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set. ⢠Each row is for one timer recording programme, with the date and time information, channel, recording mode, DVD or HDD and recording status. ⢠The amount of free space available on the HDD and the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen. ⢠In the upper-right corner, the number of timer programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms . ⢠If there are more than five timer programmes already set, press NEXT î to switch page (go back using the PREV î button). ⢠You can also delete a timer programme before itâÂÂs started (before the recorder enters timer recording standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR . See also Deleting a timer programme on page 45. 2 Select âÂÂNew Inputâ to set a new timer programme, then press ENTER. 3 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select a field; use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the value. ⢠CH â Choose a channel (2 to 69 for antenna channels; 1 to 125 for cable/Pr1 to Pr 99, excluding skip channels), or one of the external inputs from which to record. ⢠Date â Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly programme. ⢠Start â Set the recording start time. ⢠Stop â Set the recording end time (maximum length of a timer recording is 24 hours). ⢠Extend â Extend the end time of the timer recording (select Off , 30 , 60 , 90 or 120 mins). 4 If you want to change the recording mode, recording destination, etc., select âÂÂSet DetailedâÂÂ. In this area you can set: Record to â Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD for DVD recording. Select HDD for Auto Replace Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only). Recording Mode â Select XP , SP , LP, EP, SLP or SEP , (See Setting the picture quality/ recording time on page 37). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the LPCM setting, XP or MN (press ENTER then use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select the level). HDD Remain DVD Remain 59h59m(SP) 1h59m(SP) 3/26 SUN 3:00PM Tmr Pgms 3/32 Manhattan Open T ennis OK 3/26 SUN 6:00PM â 7:00PM 10ch W orld Journey OK 3/27 MON 7:30PM â 9:00PM 4ch 8ch Flower Until 4/20 MON â FRI 1:30PM â 2:00PM New Input T imer Programme View T imer Programme Set Manhattan Open T ennis CH Date Start Stop Extend 10ch EVERYDA Y 6:00PM 7:00PM 30 min Enter Details Detailed Settings Record T o HDD Recording Mode XP Auto Replace Rec. On Genre No Category Dual Mono Recording L HDD Recording Format Video Mode On Store Programme Cancel Set Title Name Set Detailed DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 44 En Auto Replace Rec. â Automatically erases the previous daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded. Genre â Select a record genre (for HDD recording only). Dual Mono/Bilingual Recording â Select which channel of a dual mono/bilingual broadcast to record (necessary if recording to a Video mode DVD or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On ). HDD Recording Format â Select Video Mode On or Video Mode Off depending on whether you need high-speed copying to Video mode DVD capability or not. 5 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight âÂÂStore Programmeâ and press ENTER . The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The timer programme you just input appears in the list. The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages: ⢠OK â Can be recorded. ⢠Time Over â Not enough space on the HDD (the recording wonâÂÂt finish). ⢠Over 12h â Recording time of over 12 hours set (when recording to the HDD the recording will be split into two titles). ⢠Overlap â Two timer programmes partially or completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take priority. ⢠Until ... (eg., Until 8/13 ) â For a regular recording, the last programme that could be recorded is shown. ⢠Data Over âÂÂCanâÂÂt record because the disc management area of the disc is full. ⢠Cancel Once â A regular timer programme is set to skip. ⢠CanâÂÂt Rec â Not possible to record. ⢠Title Over â CanâÂÂt record because there is already the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99). ⢠Recording â The programme is currently recording. ⢠Standby â The recorder is in timer recording standby. ⢠nothing displayed â Another timer recording or copying is in progress. 6 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME MENU. Tip ⢠To enter a title name for the timer recording in advance, select Set Title Name and follow the on-screen display. Note ⢠If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded doesnâÂÂt have enough free space for the complete recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unless you load a suitable disc before the recording actually starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording. (The message CanâÂÂt Rec will appear if there are already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough free space on the HDD for recording.) ⢠For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 112) is set to On , the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 ( MN4 for DVD R/ RW) recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. ⢠If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. ⢠If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 45 En 05 Editing a timer programme You can change any of the settings in a timer programme before the recording is due to start. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to change . . . . 3 Press î then select âÂÂModifyâ from the command menu panel. Alternatively, press ENTER . The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which you can edit the settings. 4 Edit the timer recording settings as necessary. 5 Select âÂÂStore Programmeâ to finish. Confirm the settings you made from the following screen. Deleting a timer programme You can delete timer programmes you no longer need. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to erase . . . . 3 Press î then select âÂÂEraseâ from the command menu panel. ⢠Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel. ⢠You can also just press CLEAR when the timer programme is highlighted. Skipping a regular timer programme If youâÂÂve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme, you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled recording. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to skip . . . . 3 Press î then select âÂÂCancel Onceâ from the command menu panel. ⢠In the timer programme list, Cancel Once appears by the programme. ⢠You can also just press î PAUSE when the timer programme is highlighted. Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time in two different ways. This can be useful if a broadcast programme overruns, for example. Cancelling or extending the timer 1 Press and hold for three seconds during a timer recording. Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears from the front panel display indicating that the timer has been cancelled. 2 Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute blocks. Programming a new end time You can edit the end time of a timer recording you have previously set. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer recording you want to change. 3 Press î then select âÂÂModifyâ from the command menu panel. Alternatively, press ENTER . The Timer Programme Set screen appears, from which you can edit the settings. 4 Edit the end time as necessary. You can also edit the Extend time parameter. REC î REC î ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 46 En 5 Select âÂÂStore ProgrammeâÂÂ. 6 Press to exit the Timer Recording screen. Stopping a timer recording 1 Press during a timer recording. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm. Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished. 1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 2 [Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED . If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCKED is briefly displayed again. ⢠To unlock the recorder, press and hold î (Stop) on the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED . ⢠Even if you make Child Lock settings, this unit can still be controlled by the remote of a connected plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be able to be controlled by another component when you have set a Child Lock, turn this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control to OFF (page 115). Timer recording FAQ Frequently Asked Questions ⢠Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesnâÂÂt start recording! Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 100), and that there are fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD. ⢠The recorder wonâÂÂt let me enter a timer programme! Why not? You canâÂÂt enter a timer programme if the clock isnâÂÂt set. ⢠What happens when two or more timer programmes overlap? Basically, the programme with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the programme with the later start time after the earlier programme is finished. If schedule to record two programmes have the same times (but different channels, for example), then only one of the two programmes will be recorded. In this event you should cancel the scheduled recording of the lesser important programme. If one of the overlapping programmes is a regular timer programme, you may choose âÂÂCancel Onceâ in order to avoid having it overlap with a separately scheduled programme (see Skipping a regular timer programme on page 45 ) . ENTER HOME MENU STOP RE C ENTER î STANDBY/ON DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 47 En 05 Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in progress from the start, without having to wait until the recording has finished (i.e., playback is âÂÂchasingâ the recording). In fact, youâÂÂre not just limited to watching the recording in progress. You can watch anything else already on the HDD (or on a DVD if youâÂÂre recording to the HDD) by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 56). Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input (DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only). Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature during Auto Start Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display). ⢠Press during recording to start playback from the beginning of the current recording 1 . ⢠Press during recording to select another title to play. You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. ⢠To stop playback, press î STOP (recording will continue). ⢠To stop recording, press î STOP REC (playback will continue). ⢠During recording or in timer recording standby, you canâÂÂt play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting doesnâÂÂt match the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117). Also, during simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop. Recording from an external component You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorderâÂÂs external inputs. 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 ( Connecting up ) for connection options. 2 Press repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. There are three analog inputs. The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display: ⢠L1 â INPUT 1/AUTO START REC ⢠L2 â INPUT 2 (front panel) ⢠L3 â INPUT 3 Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio , and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 108). ⢠If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording. Note 1 You canâÂÂt start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesnâÂÂt work while copying or backing up. HDD PLAY DISC NAVIGA TOR DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD INPUT SELECT DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 48 En ⢠To watch video coming in via the DV input (front panel), select DV > DV Video Playback from the Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on page 64). 3 Set the recording quality. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 37 for detailed information. 4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 5 Press to start recording. ⢠If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 35 for more details. Automatic recording from a satellite tuner If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top box connected to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC input, you can have the recorder start and stop recording automatically with the timer settings of the connected component. (If the other component doesnâÂÂt have a built-in timer, youâÂÂll need to use it with an external timer unit.) 1 After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder starts recording when it detects a signal from the other component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops recording. Important ⢠It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear this in mind when setting the timer. ⢠If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if another timer recording is in progress. ⢠Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer recording is due to start. After the timer recording has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume. ⢠Turn the HDMI Control setting to Off when using Auto Start Recording (page 115). 1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other component), then switch it into standby (if necessary). Check the manual that came with the receiver if youâÂÂre not sure how to do this. 2 Check that the âÂÂAudio Inâ settings for âÂÂExternal Audioâ and âÂÂDual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recordingâ are as you want them. See Audio In on page 108 for more on these settings. 3 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/ recording time on page 37 for detailed information. 4 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂTimer RecordingâÂÂ, then âÂÂAuto Start RecordingâÂÂ. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or âÂÂNoâ to switch off. If you choose âÂÂYesâ the recorder automatically goes into standby. The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights. The recorder will automatically switch on and start recording when the other component comes on. Recording stops when the external component switches off. Note 1 You canâÂÂt set Auto Start Recording when: â the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby. â the HDD is not recordable. â the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (999). REC MODE HDD DVD REC î HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 49 En 05 ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording, press î STANDBY/ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO indicator goes off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has already started, press î REC for three seconds (this cancels Auto Start Recording, but recording continues), then î STOP REC to stop recording. ⢠You can also stop recording by pressing î STOP REC then selecting Yes to confirm. Tip ⢠Alternatively, with no OSD displayed, press and hold the front panel î STOP REC button for more than three seconds to switch Auto Start Recording on directly. After switching on, switch the recorder into standby. When using the Video Control function of an external component, set the HDMI Control to Off (page 115). Playing your recordings on other DVD players Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD R discs. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD- ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to (finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc. All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ î followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. Finalizing a disc Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings on the disc so that it can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. 1 Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it canâÂÂt be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 100 before starting the steps below. DVD RW discs donâÂÂt generally need finalizing. However, if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc, then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD RW, you can still record and edit even after finalizing. although the title menu will disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu. Important ⢠Once youâÂÂve finalized a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R disc, you canâÂÂt edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe âÂÂundoneâÂÂ; see Undo Finalize on page 101 for how to do this. DVD ( VR) DVD ( V ideo) DVD R DVD RW Note 1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. DVD ( VR) DVD ( V ideo) DVD R DVD RW DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 50 En â¢A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing. ⢠DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and DVD R DL discs must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/players. Note however that some recorders/ players will not play even finalized dual- layer discs. 1 Load the disc you want to finalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. 2 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂFinalizeâ > âÂÂFinalizeâ > âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 4 For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD R/ RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select âÂÂYesâ to start finalization or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the âÂÂtop menuâ (or âÂÂmenuâ for a DVD R/ RW) is selected on any DVD player. ⢠Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. During finalization: ⢠If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD R/ RW disc is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears. ⢠You canâÂÂt cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R disc. ⢠How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) and DVD R/ RW discs can take up to 20 minutes. Initializing recordable DVD discs DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording. 1 When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 51 if you want to change the default to Video mode. DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must initialize it before recording anything on the disc. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Finalize Undo Finalize Next Screen Start Finalize ENTER Finalize Note 1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. DVD-R DVD-RW DVD RW DVD-RAM DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 51 En 05 DVD RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in order to erase the contents of the disc. Important ⢠Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD RW or DVD-RAM disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! ⢠You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder. ⢠Once initialized for VR mode recording, you canâÂÂt re-initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂInitializeâ > âÂÂVideo ModeâÂÂ, âÂÂVR Modeâ or âÂÂInitialize DVD RWâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour). DVD-RW Auto Initialize ⢠Default setting: VR Mode Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂBasicâÂÂ>âÂÂDVD-RW Auto Init.âÂÂ, then âÂÂVR Modeâ or âÂÂVideo ModeâÂÂ. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup VR Mode Video Mode Initialize DVD RW Start Start Start Initialize ENTER Initializing Disc 1 min left 2ch DVD-RW HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Basic VR Mode Video Mode Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 52 En Chapter 6 Playback Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor buttons and ENTER . To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠Many functions are not available when a Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 57). ⢠For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on page 92. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. Basic playback This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means any kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. ⢠Some DVD-Video, DVD R and DVD RW discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. 1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below. Select DVD for any kind of disc playback. 2 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double-sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 54. 3 Start playback. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. ⢠When playing video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached. ⢠There may be a slight pause when playback switches from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc. ⢠See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. 4 Press to stop playback. 5 When youâÂÂve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. A L L HDD DVD OPEN/CLOSE î PLAY STOP DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 53 En 06 Playing DVD discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. Playing from the HDD The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD). P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) DVD R/DVD RW only: î PREV may not always skip to the previous title. Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the number buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER . All: P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER CM BACK SKIP P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. P ress to display the menu of a DVD- Video disc. (DVD R/ RW discs ï¬Ânalized on this recorder will display the Disc Navigator . P ress MENU to display the disc menu.) Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD- Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items. P ress to return to the previous level of a DVD- Video disc menu. P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. STEP/SLOW î î TO P MENU DISC NAVIGA TOR MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 54 En Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs 1 , and WMA/MP3 files. Playing Video CD/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs. Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch. 2 P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. Note 1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 61). P ress to start playback. P ress to stop playback. P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER CM BACK SKIP STEP/SLOW î î PLAY STOP PA USE Except WMA: P ress to start scanning. P ress again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) P ress to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. P ress to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Video CD only: Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. 2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 57). REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER PLAY STOP PA USE DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 55 En 06 Playing DivX video files The table below shows the basic playback controls for DivX video files. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next track. When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. Note that this function doesnâÂÂt work when playing in PBC mode. P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed (forward only). While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward only). P ress to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER CM BACK SKIP STEP/SLOW î î RETURN P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback of titles (DivX ï¬Âles) proceeds in alphabetical order . P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) P ress to start slow motion playback (press repeatedly to change the slow motion play speed). While paused, press to advance one frame. P ress to display the playback audio type; press repeatedly to change the playback audio type. P ress to display subtitle information; press repeatedly to change subtitles. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW î î AUDIO SUBTITLE DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 56 En Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback. Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view information on titles. See also Editing on page 67 for more on editing recordable discs. 1 Select the HDD or DVD. 2 Open the Disc Navigator. ⢠You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu. 3 Browse the list of titles. ⢠Use the î PREV /î NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page of titles. ⢠To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 72. ⢠For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a thumbnail title digest. If it doesnâÂÂt display, set Set Preview to Normal . See Set Preview on page 116. 4 Play the highlighted title. ⢠You can also select Play from the command menu options. Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the same time. 1 Display the View Options panel. 2 Choose âÂÂStyleâÂÂ, âÂÂSort orderâ or âÂÂGenreâÂÂ, then press ENTER to see the available view options. ⢠Style â Select four or eight titles per screen view ⢠Sort order â Sort by date (most recent first), unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest first) ⢠Genre â Display all genres or just a selected genre 3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. The title list display is updated according to the new display preferences. DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD HDD DVD DISC NAVIGA TOR Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7: 00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain HDD SP Recent first All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m MENU 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 9 8 7 10 ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 3 7 4 Titles Remain NEW first All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m HDD SP MENU 1 4 Titles Sort order Recent first Genre All Genres Style The Vie w Options panel 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 57 En 06 Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs 1 Display the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂDisc NavigatorâÂÂ. Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR , which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 3 Select what you want to play. Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all navigated in the same way. The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc. Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder that you want to play. Playback starts after you press ENTER . ⢠For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the playback area between CD , WMA/MP3 and DivX . This can only be done while the disc is stopped. Scanning discs (except WMA) You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backwards. 1 1 During playback, start reverse or forward scanning. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning speed. There are four scanning speeds available when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also possible with HDD and DVD video. 2 There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc. 3 Resume normal playback. Playing in slow motion You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles can only be played forwards in slow motion. There is no sound when playing in slow motion. 1 Press to start slow motion reverse or forward play. 2 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. The current playback speed is indicated on- screen. 3 Resume normal playback. DVD-Video CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 DivX HOME MENU ENTER ENTER CD WMA/MP3 Divx Folder (01-03) 01.Rock 02.Pop 03.Dance Tr ack(001-004) 001.Intro 002.Escape 003.Everything You Say 004.What I Do Disc Navigator Note 1⢠No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles. ⢠No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1 . ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. 2 Reverse playback may not be smooth. A L L REV SCAN FWD SCAN REV SCAN FWD SCAN PLAY DVD HDD Video CD S uper VCD DivX STEP/SLOW î î STEP/SLOW î î PLAY DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 58 En Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc 1 or the HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only use frame advance. 1 Pause playback. 2 Back up or advance one frame with each press. 3 Resume normal playback. The Play Mode menu The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and programme play functions. ⢠Press to display the Play Mode menu. ⢠You can also access the Play Mode menu from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU ). ⢠To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . Search Mode The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time 2 or by title/chapter/folder/track number. 1 Select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the Play Mode menu, then choose a search option. The available search options depend on the type of disc. 2 Enter a title/chapter/folder/ track number or a search time. Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2 , 5 , 0 , 0 . For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1 , 1 , 5 , 2 , 0 . Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current track, press 2 , 3 , 0 . Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6 . 3 Start playback. Note 1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. DVD HDD Video CD S uper VCD DivX PA USE STEP/SLOW î î PLAY A L L PLAY MODE Ti me Search Ti tle Search Chapter Search Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme 2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. A L L ENTER ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR Ti me Search Ti tle Search Chapter Search Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Input Time 0.01.00 ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 59 En 06 A-B Repeat The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over. 1 1 During playback, select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 With âÂÂA (Loop Start)â highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to start. 3 With âÂÂB (Loop End)â highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round. ⢠When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD R/ RW, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. ⢠To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if youâÂÂre using the HDD for playback. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with programme play to repeat the tracks/ chapters in the programme list (see Programme play below). 2 ⢠Select âÂÂRepeatâ from the Play Mode menu, then choose a repeat play mode. ⢠To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Programme play This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters 3 /folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD. 1 Select âÂÂProgrammeâ from the Play Mode menu, then âÂÂInput/Edit ProgrammeâÂÂ. Note 1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled. DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX ENTER ENTER Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off ENTER 2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled. 3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. A L L ENTER Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Repeat Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Off HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 60 En The Input/Edit Programme screen varies according to the disc type. Below is the DVD input screen. 2 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the programme list. After pressing ENTER to add the title/ chapter/folder/track, the step number automatically moves down one. ⢠To insert a step into the programme list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER , all the subsequent steps move down one. ⢠To delete a step from the programme list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR . 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list. A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/ chapters/folders/tracks. 4 Play the programme list. Programme play remains active until you cancel programme play, erase the programme list, eject the disc or switch off the recorder. Tip ⢠To save your programme list and exit the programme edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . ⢠During programme play, press î NEXT to skip to the next programme step. ⢠To repeat play the programme list, select Programme Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 59). ⢠Press CLEAR during playback to switch off programme play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the programme list. ⢠From the Programme menu you can also: Start Programme Play â Starts playback of a saved programme list Cancel Programme Play â Turns off programme play, but does not erase the programme list Erase Programme List â Erases the programme list and turns off programme play Displaying and switching subtitles Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. 1 Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options. ⢠Select/change the subtitle language. The current subtitle language is shown on- screen and in the front panel display. ⢠To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR . Programme Step 01.001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Ti tle (01-03) Ti tle 01 Ti tle 02 Ti tle 03 Chapter(001-015) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Chapter 005 Chapter 006 Chapter 007 Chapter 008 ENTER PLAY Note 1⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 111. DVD-Video DivX SUBTITLE DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 61 En 06 Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback. 1 Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options. ⢠Change the audio soundtrack. The current audio language is shown on- screen and in the front panel display. ⢠The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. ⢠Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver on page 20 for connection details. Switching audio channels Taiwan and Philippines model: For HDD 2 and VR mode content that has both a main and a SAP (Secondary Audio Programme) audio channel, you can switch between main ( L ), SAP ( R ), or both ( L R ). 3 Other: For HDD 2 and VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left ( L ) channel, right ( R ) channel, or both ( L R ). 3 When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. ⢠Press repeatedly to display/ switch the audio channel. The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-screen. Taiwan and Philippines model: L R â Both channels (default) L â Left/main channel only R â Right/SAP channel only Other: L R â Both channels (default) L â Left channel only R â Right channel only Stereo â Stereo (default) 1/L â Left channel only 2/R â Right channel only 1 Stereo â Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default) 1 L â Soundtrack 1 / Left channel 1 R â Soundtrack 1 / Right channel 2 Stereo â Soundtrack 2 / Stereo 2 L â Soundtrack 2 / Left channel 2 R â Soundtrack 2 / Right channel Note 1⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 110. 2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off ( HDD Recording Format on page 113). 3 When playing a dual mono recording/bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital î PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 109) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. DVD-Video DivX AUDIO DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 AUDIO HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM CD V ideo CD WMA/MP3 S uper VCD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 62 En Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles â check the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you prefer â see Angle Indicator on page 114). ⢠Switch the camera angle. ⢠The angle number is displayed on- screen. ⢠If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. Displaying disc information on-screen You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded or the HDD. ⢠Display/change the on-screen information. ⢠Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc). ⢠To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears. HDD and removable disc activity display Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD button to switch between the two kinds of display. The example displays below show high- speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback. DVD-Video ANGLE DISPLAY Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Stop Remain â h â â m Stop Hi-Speed Copy HDD î DVD 0h08m left DVD-RW Video Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Chase Play Rec Remain 0h52m Stop DVD-RW Video Relative pla yback position Recording time Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name : Comedy shows Finalized Resume XP (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once St ereo WNBC Sh ow s recording restrictions for the current channel programme î Play DVD-R Video Title Name 11/21 Soccer game : C hapter T otal îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî C hapter Time 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 ! 0. 00. 21 0h01m52s 4.32Mbps Indicates copy-protected material Indicates a multi-angle scene Indicates the data transfer ra te DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 63 En 06 Tip ⢠See Switching camera angles on page 62 for more on multi-angle scene switching. ⢠When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only. ⢠During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed. ⢠The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. ⢠The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the displayed record setting. ⢠Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD. ⢠The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused. ⢠Copy Once or CanâÂÂt Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV programme contains copy control information. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 07 64 En Chapter 7 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder. Important ⢠If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, you cannot control the second unit from this one. ⢠You canâÂÂt control this unit remotely from a component connected to the DV IN jack. Playing from a DV camcorder 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. 2 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like. See DV Input on page 109 for more on this. ⢠Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 108). 3 Select âÂÂDVâÂÂ, then âÂÂDV Video Playbackâ from the Home Menu. 4 Start playback on the camcorder. Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV. ⢠To record the incoming video, Use the HDD and DVD button to select the HDD or a DVD for recording, then press î REC . Press î STOP REC to finish recording. If there is no signal from the device connected to the DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a recordable signal. ⢠The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if the signal is interrupted during recording. ⢠If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 35 for more details. Recording from a DV camcorder ⢠The source signal must be DVC-SD format. ⢠You canâÂÂt record date and time information from DV cassette. ⢠During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will pause recording. Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is more than two minutes of blank tape, this recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder). Copying from a DV source Using the recorderâÂÂs remote, you can control both the camcorder and this recorder. Important ⢠Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorderâÂÂs remote. ⢠For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to play-pause. HOME MENU DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 65 En 07 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 Set the recording quality. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 37 for detailed information. 3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like. See DV Input on page 109 for more on this. ⢠Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 108). 4 Select âÂÂDVâÂÂ, then âÂÂCopy from a DV Sourceâ from the Home Menu. ⢠DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. 5 Select âÂÂRecord to Hard Disk Driveâ or âÂÂRecord to DVDâÂÂ. 6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. For best results, pause playback at the point from which you want to record. ⢠Depending on your camcorder, you can use this recorderâÂÂs remote to control the camcorder using the î , î , î , î , î , î and î buttons. 7 Select âÂÂStart RecâÂÂ. ⢠You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording. ⢠If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately. ⢠HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for example. ⢠If you donâÂÂt want to see the DV recording screen during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press again to display). ⢠While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button. DV Auto Copy DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the contents of a DV source to the HDD or a DVD. 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 Set the recording quality. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 37 for detailed information. 3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require. See DV Input on page 109 for more on this. ⢠Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 108). 4 Select âÂÂDVâÂÂ, then âÂÂDV Auto Copyâ from the Home Menu. ⢠DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. REC MODE HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Start Rec Pause Rec Stop Rec SP (2h00m/DVD) 32h45m î Stop î Stop 1.02.22 Control with these buttons î î î î î îÂÂî Rem. HDD REC MODE HOME MENU DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 07 66 En 5 Select âÂÂRecord to Hard Disk Driveâ or âÂÂRecord to DVDâÂÂ. The DV tape is rewound to the beginning. Once it is rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and copied to either the HDD or a DVD. ⢠If there is a gap of two minutes or more between recorded contents, the copying process is automatically stopped. ⢠Once copying is finished, the DV tape is automatically rewound. ⢠To cancel the copying process, press î STOP REC for more than three seconds. About automatic finalization If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized after copying is complete. ⢠You canâÂÂt customize the background for DVD-R/-RW or DVD R/ RW disc finalization. ⢠No title names are assigned. ⢠If you want to give the disc a name, please do so before you start the copy (see Input Disc Name on page 100). ⢠If a timer recording is scheduled to start, and in some other instances, the disc will not be finalized. Frequently Asked Questions â¢I canâÂÂt get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what youâÂÂre trying to record is not copy- protected. If it still doesnâÂÂt work, try switching off the camcorder then switch back on. ⢠ThereâÂÂs a picture, but no sound! Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on page 109) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 . 1 About DV Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394- 1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals. âÂÂi.LINKâ and the âÂÂi.LINKâ logo are trademarks. ⢠This recorder is only compatible with DV- format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible. ⢠You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time to this recorder. ⢠You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN jack. ⢠It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN jack. ⢠DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on page 109). ⢠Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz). ⢠Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source component pauses playback or plays an unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the source component, or the DV cable is disconnected. ⢠The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output functionality. ENTER Note 1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 108). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 67 En 08 Chapter 8 Editing Editing options The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types. *1 DVD-R/-RW only HDD DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD R/ RW DVD-R/-RW , DVD-RAM (VR mode) Original Play List Create (page 69) î Play (page 69) îÂÂî î î Erase (page 69) îÂÂî î î Edit > Title Name (page 70) îÂÂî î î Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 72) îÂÂî î î Edit > Erase Section (page 72) îÂÂî î Edit > Divide (page 73) îÂÂî Edit > Chapter Edit (page 73) îÂÂî î Edit > Set Genre (page 74) î Edit > Lock (page 75) îÂÂî î Edit > Move (page 75) î Edit > Combine (page 76) î Genre Name (page 76) î Multi-Mode (page 77) î Undo (page 77) îÂÂî *1 î *1 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 68 En The Disc Navigator screen The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) discs, DVD R/ RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video content on the internal hard disk drive. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. ⢠Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117. ⢠During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be played. 1 Select the HDD or DVD. 2 Display the Disc Navigator screen. Playback will automatically stop when you do this. ⢠The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu. ⢠Press to display the command menu panel. Use the îÂÂ/î and ENTER buttons to navigate the menus. ⢠When in the title list, press to display the previous/next page if there are more titles than can be displayed. ⢠Press to change the title information displayed in the title list. ⢠Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens. ⢠If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting Play List from the view options panel (press î , then select Play List from the view options, then Play List ). ⢠Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently recorded titles that havenâÂÂt yet been played. 3 Press to exit the Disc Navigator. Editing accuracy Some editing commands ask you whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy ( Video Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing ). Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use the high-speed copy function to make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise. The edit point you choose will only be accurate to within one-half to one second. On the other hand, these edit points will be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. HDD DVD DISC NAVIGA TOR Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain Recent first All Genres 10Titles 30h30m 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 HDD SP MENU View options panel Selected titl e Command menu pane l Title thumbnai lT i t le informatio n Title lis t Available recording tim e 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) PREV NEXT DISPLAY HDD DVD Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles 10Titles MENU Original 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Style 4 Titles PlayList Original DISC NAVIGA TOR DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 69 En 08 HDD genres The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize your HDD video content you can assign different genres to titles. There are 10 genres in total, including ten user-definable ones that you can name as you like. Create Play List only Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it. Before you can use this command, make sure that the Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the left. 1 Select âÂÂCreateâ from the command menu panel. 2 Select an original title to add to the Play List. Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as necessary to the Play List. Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Highlight the title you want to play. 2 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the command menu panel. Playback of the title you selected starts. Erase Use this function to erase unwanted titles. When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW (Video mode) or DVD RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc. 1 Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD R, will not result in any more free space on the disc. DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Remain 0Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode 2h00m(1.0G) Play List Play Erase Edit Undo Create No title ENTER Note 1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD R/ RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers. DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 70 En 1 Highlight the title you want to erase. 2 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the command menu panel. 3 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. Tip ⢠You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER . Title Name You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD R/ RW discs. 1 Highlight the title you want to name (or rename). 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂTitle Nameâ from the command menu panel. 3 Input a name for the selected title. â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the î REV SCAN / î FWD SCAN buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( î PREV / î NEXT ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name below. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . ENTER ENTER DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Divide Chapter Edit ENTER Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 71 En 08 Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown. If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button (for example a P and an R ), press î FWD SCAN to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters. *1 lower-case: ÿ; upper -case: àUsing a USB keyboard to enter a name (DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only) Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes entering names very quick and convenient. 1 When in USB keyboard input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in the lower-left of the screen. 2 Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys, use the following keys when entering names: Key Characters Key Characters 1 . , â ? ! â & 1 6 m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ 2 a b c 2 ä àá â ã æ ç 7 p q r s 7 $ ÿ/à*1 3 d e f 3 è é ë ê 8 t u v 8 ü ù û ú 4 g h i 4 î ï ì àá 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 ã 0 0 î [cursor back] î [cursor forward] îÂÂ/ î [change case] CLEAR [clear character] î <space> î [ï¬Ânish name input] ~ ( ) _ / : ; â ` ^ @ # â % ÃÂ¥ | = { } [ ] < > Note 1⢠ItâÂÂs possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See also Connecting a USB device on page 24 for more connection information. ⢠Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters. 2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will automatically switch to remote control input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode. Key Function Change the cursor position Select CAPS Select small Delete character at the current cursor position Delete the character at the previous cursor position Enter the name Exit the input screen îÂÂî F1 F2 delete back space enter esc DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 72 En Set Thumbnail You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in that title. 1 Highlight the title you want to change the thumbnail picture for. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂSet Thumbnailâ from the command menu panel. The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you can find the frame you want. 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set. You can also use the chapter and time search features (press PLAY MODE ), and the CM SKIP and CM BACK buttons. 4 Select âÂÂExitâ to return to the Edit screen. Erase Section Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Highlight the title containing the section you want to erase. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂErase Sectionâ from the command menu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. ⢠For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 68. 4 Highlight âÂÂFromâ then use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then press ENTER. The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker shows the start of the section. HDD DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit Set Thumbnail (HDD) î Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 00.00.09.15 Exit OK Exit OK HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER ENTER ! Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Erase Section (HDD) î Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP Exit From To 00.00.09.15 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 73 En 08 5 Highlight âÂÂToâ then, in the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER . After pressing ENTER , another marker indicates the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds). Divide Play List only Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be recombined into one again. 1 Highlight the title you want to divide. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂDivideâ from the command menu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. ⢠For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 68. 4 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the place you want to divide the title. 5 Press to divide the title at the current playback position. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. Chapter Edit When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing. 1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you want to edit. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂChapter Editâ from the command menu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. ENTER ENTER HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER ! Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Divide Title (HDD) î Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10ÃÂ1 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP Cancel 00.00.09.15 Divide ENTER ENTER Ye s Divided titles cannot be combined. OK? No ! DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HDD ENTER ENTER ! Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 74 En ⢠For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 68. 4 Select the command you want: ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter, then press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or 99 chapters per HDD title). ⢠Erase 1 /Move 2 â Erase or move chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER . Select whether you want to erase or move the chapter. Move command only: Select the destination for the chapter, and press ENTER . ⢠Combine 3 â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER . 5 Select âÂÂExitâ to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Set Genre Use this command to assign a genre to a title. 1 Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂSet Genreâ from the command menu panel. Note 1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. 2 VR mode Play List only. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) Rec. time 1âÂÂ1 î Play 0.00.00 12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 1h00m Chapters 5 Exit Erase/Move Combine Divide Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 002 003 005 004 001 Rec. time Chapter 1h00m 0h01m 12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP Exit Erase/Move Combine Divide Move Cancel Erase 3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 2 3 5 4 1 Rec. time 1h00m 12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP Exit Erase/Move Divide Combin e ENTER HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 75 En 08 3 Select a genre for the title. Lock Original only You can lock a title so that it canâÂÂt be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also canâÂÂt undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu. 1 Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock). 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂLockâ from the command menu panel. An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. Move Play List only Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles. 1 Highlight the title you want to move. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂMoveâ from the command menu panel. 3 Select a new position for the title. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle name Erase Section Edit Chapter Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Divide Free4 Free1 Free5 Free6 Free3 No Category Free2 HDD DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 1 2 3 4 DVD VR Mode Play List 2h00m(1.0G) 1 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Move Combine Chapter Edit ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m Play List 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 1 3 4 MENU DVD VR Mode 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Insert position Title to mov e DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 76 En Combine Play List only Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one. 1 Highlight the title you want to combine. This title will remain in the same place after combining with another title. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂCombineâ from the command menu panel. 3 Select another title to combine with the first. This title will be appended to the first title selected. The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended to title 1. 4 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. Genre Name Use this command to rename one of the ten user-definable genres ( Free 1 to Free 10 ). 1 Select âÂÂGenre Nameâ from the command menu panel. 2 Select one of the user- definable genre names. 3 Input a name for the genre. ⢠The name can be up to 12 characters long. DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode Play List 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 1 3 4 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Move Combine Chapter Edit ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode MENU Play List 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 1 2 1 3 4 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) ENTER Ye s OK to combine titles 1 and 3 ? No ! HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Free1 Free2 Free3 Free4 Free 5 Free6 Free7 ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 77 En 08 ⢠For information on remote control key short cuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 71. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ to enter the name and exit. Multi-Mode Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at once, for example. 1 Select âÂÂMulti-Modeâ from the command menu panel. 2 Select titles from the title list. Selected titles are marked with a î . 3 Select the command that you want applied to all the marked titles. For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles. Once the command is completed, Multi- Mode is automatically exited. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you can only undo the last edit you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the command menu panel. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. Input Genre Name CAPS small OK Clear Space Free 1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø ENTER HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode ENTER ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10 Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mod e Change Genre Lock Unlock Single Mode Erase DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain 0Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode 2h00m(1.0G) Play List Play Erase Edit Create Undo No title DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 78 En Frequently asked questions ⢠Why doesnâÂÂt the available recording time increase when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R? When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD R), the titles are no longer displayed, but the content remains on the disc. DVD-R/ R are write-once media; they canâÂÂt be erased or rewritten. â¢I canâÂÂt edit my disc! You may find that as the available recording time is reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no longer possible. This is because information about your edits requires a certain amount of disc space. As you edit, this information builds up, eventually preventing you from editing further. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 79 En 09 Chapter 9 Copying and backup Introduction Use the copying features of this recorder to: ⢠Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD. ⢠Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play in another player. ⢠Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing. ⢠Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy below for detailed instructions. For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 81 for detailed instructions. Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum copying times on page 119 for more on copying times. If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is always done in real-time. When real-time copying from the HDD to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers in the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) on page 112). Restrictions on copying Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD. Some video material is copy-once protected. This means that it can be recorded to HDD, but it canâÂÂt then be freely copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, youâÂÂll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM- compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on page 36 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and after itâÂÂs been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected). You can identify copy-once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark ( ! ) is shown. Copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. One Touch Copy * See also Copyright above. The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of where in the title you start the copy. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 09 80 En HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in whatever recording mode is currently set. Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when trying to copy from the HDD. 1 If youâÂÂre copying from DVD to the HDD, select a recording mode. Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title playing will not result in a better quality recording. 2 Press during playback to copy the current title. The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied. ⢠High-speed copying is used when copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying. ⢠Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the title. Cancelling One Touch Copy You can cancel a One Touch Copy once itâÂÂs started. ⢠Press and hold for more than a second. Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is erased. ⢠If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/ R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the pre-copy figure. Notes on copying using One Touch Copy Copying to DVD ⢠Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied. ⢠The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected. â¢A title that contains mixed aspect ratios canâÂÂt be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Use a DVD-R/ -RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. ⢠Low resolution ( SEP through LP modes 1 ) widescreen material canâÂÂt be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. ⢠When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP / MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high- speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM. ⢠Recordings of dual mono/bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM. ⢠XP titles cannot be copied to DVD via One Touch Copy. ⢠Titles over eight hours cannot be copied to single-layer DVD R/ RW discs using One Touch Copy. Use DVD R DL discs for titles over eight hours. ⢠Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD R/ RW using One Touch Copy. Copying to the HDD ⢠The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours. ⢠Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW. REC MODE ONE TOUCH COPY ONE TOUCH COPY Note 1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 81 En 09 ⢠Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original. ⢠If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied. Using Copy Lists * See also Copyright on page 79. At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list, erasing chapters you donâÂÂt need, or re- naming titles, for example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual video content; only the âÂÂvirtualâ content of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the actual content is not being altered. Copying from HDD to DVD Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. ⢠The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. ⢠The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System setting is changed (see Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117). ⢠Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 134) will erase the Copy List. 1 Load a recordable DVD. ⢠It is possible to complete the following steps without having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are slightly different. ⢠If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the copy, make sure it is initialized before you start. 2 Select âÂÂCopyâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂHDD î DVDâÂÂ. If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 5 below. 4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the recorder, choose whether to âÂÂCreate New Copy Listâ or âÂÂContinue Using Previous Copy ListâÂÂ. ⢠If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List , skip to step 10 below. ⢠Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder. 5 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add). Titles youâÂÂve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink. HOME MENU ENTER HDD DVD Disc Back-up DVD/CD HDD Continue Using Previous Copy List Create New Copy List ENTER Copy Select Title Recent first All Genres 8 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 0.0G 4.3G 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Back Nex t SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 7:00PM 2h00m(1.0G) 2ch Free1 HDD DVD (Video mode ) 1 > 2 > 3 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 09 82 En There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW: ⢠When adding titles that contain copy- once protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added. ⢠When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title if high-speed copying is possible. Depending on the title 1 , high-speed copying may not be possible to DVDs. 6 Press î to display the command menu panel. 7 Select âÂÂNextâ to move on to the Title Edit screen. 8 To edit a title, highlight it using the îÂÂ/î buttons, then press ENTER . A menu of editing commands appears: ⢠Erase â Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 69). ⢠Title Name â Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see Title Name on page 70). ⢠Erase Section â Erase part of a title (see Erase Section on page 72). ⢠Move â Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 75). ⢠Preview â Check the content of a title in the Copy List. ⢠Divide â Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see Divide on page 73). ⢠Combine â Combine two titles in the Copy List into one (see Combine on page 76). ⢠Chapter Edit â Edit chapters within a Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on page 73): ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two. ⢠Erase/Move â Erase a chapter/ Change the chapter order. ⢠Combine â Combine two chapters into one. Note 1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD R/ RW: ⢠Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP mode. The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD R/ RW: ⢠Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution ( SEP through LP / MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On)). ⢠LP / MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off. ⢠Dual mono/Bilingual recordings. ⢠Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes. The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD: ⢠XP titles. Copy Select Title Recent first All Genres 8 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 7:00PM 2h00m(1.0G) 2ch Free1 HDD DVD (Video mode ) 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next The Command Menu panel Copy T itle Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP HDD DVD (Video mode ) 1 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP Copy T itle Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) HDD DVD (Video mode ) 1 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP Erase T itle Name Erase Section Move Preview Cancel DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 83 En 09 ⢠Set Thumbnail â Set the thumbnail frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on page 72). ⢠Recording Mode â Set the picture quality of the copy (see Recording Mode on page 84). ⢠Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual â Set how dual mono/bilingual audio should be copied when copying from HDD to DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) and DVD R/ RW (see Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual on page 85). ⢠Cancel â Exit the menu. Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing. 9 Display the command menu panel. 10 Select âÂÂNextâ to proceed. There are several options available from the next screen: ⢠Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 84). ⢠Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc or DVD R/ RW. (The input method is similar to that of naming titles; see Title Name on page 70.) ⢠Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R after copying. 1 Select a title menu style from the following screen. 11 Select âÂÂStart Copyâ to start copying. ⢠If youâÂÂre using a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc and the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total bar will be purple. ⢠The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc is already full. Copying from DVD to HDD Important ⢠The DVD to HDD Copy screen isnâÂÂt accessible when a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy function, however (See One Touch Copy on page 79). ⢠The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. ⢠The Copy List will be erased if: â any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited. â the disc tray is opened. â playback is switched between Play List and Original. â the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized. ENTER Copy T itle Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP HDD DVD (Video mode ) Note 1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized. ENTER Copy HDD DVD (Video Mode) Start Copy Copy Time 0 h 1 6m Recording Mode Disc Name Finalize Back Recording Mode Input Disc Name Finalize Start Copy Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 4.3G 4.3G DVD-RW Video Mode HDD High-Speed Off 1 > 2 > 3 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 09 84 En â the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 134). ⢠It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC. 1 Select âÂÂCopyâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂDVD/CD î HDDâÂÂ. 3 Select a Copy List type. ⢠Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder. 4 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add). Titles youâÂÂve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink. 5 Select âÂÂNextâ from the command menu panel to proceed to the title edit screen. 6 Select a title to edit. A menu appears of Copy List editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 69). ⢠Move â Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 75). ⢠Preview â Check the content of a title in the Copy List. ⢠Cancel â Exit the menu. Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing. 7 Select âÂÂNextâ from the command menu panel to proceed to the copy options screen. ⢠Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode below). 8 Select âÂÂStart Copyâ to start copying. Recording Mode 1 Select âÂÂRecording Modeâ from the command menu panel. 2 Select a recording mode for the copy. ⢠High-Speed Copy 1 â The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. ⢠XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP , SEP , MN 2 â The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.) If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting ( MN1 to MN32 3 , LPCM or XP 4 ) from the Recording Quality box that appears. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Note 1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original. 2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) on page 112). 3 When copying to a DVD R/ RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available. 4 XP mode available only when copying to HDD. ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 85 En 09 ⢠Optimized 1,2 â The recording quality is automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-time. When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you wonâÂÂt be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual 1 Select the title containing the audio you want to change. 2 Select âÂÂDual Mono Audio/ Bilingualâ from the command menu panel. 3 Select a dual mono audio/ bilingual option. Using disc backup * See also Copyright on page 79. This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD R/ RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk drive 3 , then on to another recordable DVD disc. 1 Select âÂÂCopyâÂÂ, then âÂÂDisc backupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select a backup option. There are three backup options: ⢠Start new disc back-up â Start making a backup of a disc. ⢠Resume writing data â Record the backup data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD. ⢠Erase back-up data â Erase the backup data on the HDD. 3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of. You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs, finalized DVD R or DVD RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs). 4 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. ⢠To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY . Note 1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) on page 112). 2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always exactly fill a disc. 3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD. ENTER ENTER HOME MENU ENTER Start new disc back-up Resume writing data Erase back-up data No disc. Please load a disc to be backed-up. Start Cancel Disc Back-up ENTER Read from disc and save to HDD. Start reading? Start Cancel Disc Back-up DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 09 86 En ⢠You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. 5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD. * If youâÂÂre using a DVD-RW or DVD RW, the disc doesnâÂÂt have to be blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the backup process. You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup. ⢠If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot undo the finalization later. ⢠Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc youâÂÂre backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc. ⢠DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD R/ RW discs can only be backed up to DVD R/ RW discs. 6 Select âÂÂStartâ to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc. ⢠To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY . ⢠You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD RW disc you can re-initialize it in order to make it usable again â see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 50.) 7 After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc, you can select whether to make another backup of the same data or exit. ⢠Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another backup copy, return to step 6 above. 8 If you donâÂÂt need to keep the backup data on the HDD, you can delete it now. Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to). ⢠If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD, you can make backup copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu. Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive. Please eject the disc and load a recordable disc Start Cancel Disc Back-up Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive. The disc contents will be overwritten. OK to start? Start Cancel Disc Back-up Disc back-up finished. To make another back-up copy, please load a recordable disc. Start Cancel Disc Back-up The backed-up data is still on the HDD. Erasing it will increase the free space available. OK to Erase? Ye s No Disc Back-up DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 87 En 10 Chapter 10 Using the Jukebox The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorderâÂÂs HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/-RW/ -ROM, DVD, USB device or PC (USB function only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR-550H- S). Once on the HDD, you can name albums and tracks, assign them a genre, and set tracks that you donâÂÂt want to play to Jump. Copying music to the HDD The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD audio, WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. All tracks are copied from each CD/DVD as an album. 1 WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on page 91). Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order they appear on the CD/DVD. Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD disc. Important ⢠While copying, no other recorder operation is possible. ⢠When copying, scheduled timer recordings will not start until copying is complete. ⢠Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully. 1 Load the CD/DVD you want to copy to the HDD. 2 Select âÂÂCopyâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂDVD/CD to HDDâÂÂ. On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD or all WMA/MP3 files on the DVD are copied to the HDD. ⢠You can also start copying by starting playback of the CD/DVD and then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY . ⢠To cancel copying press ENTER . ⢠If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play. Copying files via USB ( DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) Connecting a regular USB device You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD. 1 Connect the USB device. 2 Select âÂÂJukeboxâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂListen to Music from USB DeviceâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂCopy Albumâ from the command menu panel. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to the HDD. Note 1⢠Up to 999 albums can be created in the Jukebox. If you copy via Connect PC, the total number of albums you are able to create may be less than 999 (for more information, see page 89). ⢠Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source. ⢠When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a brief pause in sound between tracks. HOME MENU ENTER HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 10 88 En ⢠Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be copied/displayed. Connect PC Using a USB connection, you can copy WMA and MP3 files from a PC to the HDD of this device. Operations carried out on the PC require Windows Media Player 10. Important ⢠If the PC you are using does not currently have Windows Media Player 10 installed, you must first install the program and make sure it functions correctly before connecting the USB cable and attempting to use the Connect PC function. ⢠For more information on Connect PC, see Using a PC on page 25. ⢠You cannot edit or delete albums from this device when it is connected to a PC via USB. If you wish to edit or delete albums via the Jukebox, you must first disconnect the USB cable. 1 Connect the PC via USB cable. The screen below is displayed. Choose âÂÂTake no actionâ and click âÂÂOKâÂÂ. *Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 10, the screen shown below may not be displayed. 2 Select âÂÂJukeboxâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂConnect PCâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. 5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the device. If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import screen is automatically closed. To reopen it, you will have to repeat steps 2 through 4 . 'T ake no action' 'OK' HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Connect PC 000 Folders ( 000 error ) 000000 Files ( 000 error ) Standby Exit Number of copied folders Sta tus Number of files unable to be copied Number of copied files DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 89 En 10 6 Open Windows Media Player 10 on the PC. The device settings screen appears. Click âÂÂCancelâÂÂ. *Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 10, the screen shown below may not be displayed. From the PC, in Windows Media Player 10: 1. Click âÂÂLibraryâÂÂ. 2. Choose the artist, album or song you would like to copy, and press the right mouse button. 3. Click âÂÂAdd to Sync listâ (when choosing songs, click âÂÂAdd toâ then âÂÂSync listâÂÂ). 4. Click âÂÂStart SyncâÂÂ. This begins the synchronization process. When finished, the message âÂÂSynchronized to Deviceâ is displayed in Windows Media Player 10. For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows Media Player 10. ⢠To cancel the synchronization process while it is underway, press ENTER on the remote control. The Connect PC screen is closed. ⢠If synchronization fails, make sure that the Pioneer. HDD/DVD-Recorder device is selected at the synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 10, and try again. 7 When you have finished copying files, close Windows Media Player 10 on the PC. 8 Close the import screen on this device. ⢠If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after copying, the import screen is automatically closed. Note ⢠When using the sync function of Windows Media Player 10, music, artist and album folders are created as follows: 'Cancel' 'Start Sync' Connect PC 001 Folders ( 000 error ) 000003 Files ( 000 error ) Copying Exit Progress Bar ENTER Root Artist 1 Music Album 1 Album 2 Artist 2 Album 1 music1.mp3 music1.mp3 music2.mp3 music1.wma DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 10 90 En ⢠Folders containing no files are not displayed in the Jukebox (such as the above âÂÂArtist1â and âÂÂArtist2â folders), but do count toward the maximum of 999 folders allowed in Jukebox. ⢠Up to 999 tracks can be included in one album. Note that when there are many tracks contained in one album, it may take time to display and transfer these tracks. ⢠Albums and tracks with no set name that are transferred from CD/DVD/USB are displayed as âÂÂUnknownAlbumâ and âÂÂUnknownFileâ in Windows Media Player 10. ⢠Album and track names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may display differently in Windows Media Player 10 and the Jukebox. ⢠When albums are deleted in the Jukebox, their file hierarchy as displayed in Windows Media Player may change. ⢠File whose extensions are not supported by the Jukebox (i.e. files that are not .mp3 or .wma) cannot be transferred. ⢠Files imported to this recorder via Connect PC cannot be exported from this recorder. ⢠Note that no recording functions, including timer recordings, will be carried out when you are using the Connect PC function. Playing music from the Jukebox You can select albums or individual tracks from the Jukebox to play. 1 Select âÂÂJukeboxâ from the Home Menu. For DVR-450H-S, skip to step 3 . 2 Select a Jukebox option. ⢠Listen to Music/Edit â Listen to CDs or WMA/MP3 files that have been copied to the HDD. ⢠Listen to Music from USB device â Listen to music from an external USB device. 3 Select what you want to play. The screen below shows albums stored on the HDD: ⢠If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are not set to Jump will play. ⢠If you want to start playback from a selected track in an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press î to enter the track list then select a track to play. ⢠Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER HDD By number Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical T otal 12 70 MB 10Albums Jukebox 47.0 G Remain All Genres Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name 3-10 0.03.58 î 4 Album2 5 Album3 6 Album4 7 Album5 8 Album6 9 Album7 10 Album8 3 Album1 ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Album name Info for selected album Playback status HDD By number Jupiter classical MP3 8 MB 10Albums Jukebox 47.0 G Remain All Genres Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name 3-10 0.03.58 î 4 Album2 5 Album3 6 Album4 7 Album5 8 Album6 9 Album7 10 Album8 3 Album1 ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Mars Venus Mercury Jupiter Saturn Uranus Neptune T rack name DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 91 En 10 Changing the album view 1 From the album list, display the view options menu panel. 2 Select a view option. ⢠Sort order By number â Albums are listed by the album number. By favourite â Most often listened to music appears at the top of the list. By album â Albums are listed alphabetically. ⢠Genre All Genres â All albums are displayed. Genre â Only albums in the selected genre are displayed. Editing Jukebox albums A number of commands are available for editing and changing the playback behavior of albums. 1 Select âÂÂJukeboxâ from the Home Menu. For DVR-450H-S, skip to step 3 . 2 Select âÂÂListen to Music/EditâÂÂ. 3 Select what you want to edit. 4 Select an edit function from the command menu panel. ⢠Erase â Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an album are selected, the whole album is erased). ⢠Edit > Album name â Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the album. See page Title Name on page 70 for how to enter names. ⢠Edit > Track name â Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the track. See page Title Name on page 70 for how to enter names. ⢠Edit > Set Genre â Set or change the genre for the album. ⢠Edit > Jump Set 1 â Set a track to jump so that it doesnâÂÂt play (choose this command again to cancel the Jump setting). ⢠Play Mode â Change the playback order for albums and tracks. ⢠Genre Name â Enter a name of up to 12 characters for a genre. See page Title Name on page 70 for how to enter names. ENTER HDD By number Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical T otal 12 70 MB 10Albums Jukebox 47.0 G Remain All Genres Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name 3-10 0.03.58 î 4 Album2 5 Album3 6 Album4 7 Album5 8 Album6 9 Album7 10 Album8 3 Album1 ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Sort order Genre All Genres By number By number By favourite Cancel By album HDD By number Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical T otal 12 70 MB 10Albums Jukebox 47.0 G Remain All Genres Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name 3-10 0.03.58 î 4 Album2 5 Album3 6 Album4 7 Album5 8 Album6 9 Album7 10 Album8 3 Album1 ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Sort order By number Genre All Genres All Genres No Category Jazz Classical Pop Rock Best Note 1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 11 92 En Chapter 11 The PhotoViewer From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped digital camera (USB function only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR- 550H-S). 1 You can also import files and save them to the recorderâÂÂs HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. Locating JPEG picture files 1 Select âÂÂPhotoViewerâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select the location of the files you want to view or edit. ⢠View/Edit Photos on the HDD â View or edit photos already stored on the recorderâÂÂs HDD. ⢠View Photos on a CD/DVD â View photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD- R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW. ⢠View Photos on a USB Device ( DVR- 650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) â View photos on a digital camera (or other USB device) connected to the USB port. ⢠Copy Files from a Digital Camera ( DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) â Copy all DCF files directly from a connected digital camera to a recordable DVD-R/ -RW. 3 Select the folder containing the files you want to view, copy or edit. The first image from the selected folder is displayed as thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. From the Folder Information column, you can change thumbnails via the î REV SCAN / î FWD SCAN buttons. Note 1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 94). HOME MENU ENTER View/Edit Photos on the HDD View Photos on a USB Device Copy Files from a Digital Camera View Photos on a CD/DVD ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Currently selected folder in folder list Folder informa tion Pages in fo lder list DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 93 En 11 4 Select the file you want to view, copy or edit. ⢠The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder to load the file. ⢠You can change folders via the î REV SCAN / î FWD SCAN buttons. ⢠If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created disc compatibility on page 11). ⢠The thumbnail of files that cannot be played is displayed as the logo. Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer You can choose to display photos by grouping them by folder, file, or number of thumbnails. 1 Display the View Options panel. 2 Choose âÂÂDisplay Modeâ or âÂÂStyleâ then press ENTER to see the available view options. ⢠Display Mode â Choose between folder and file display modes. ⢠Style â Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12 thumbnails. 3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. The display mode will change to that which you have chosen. Playing a slideshow 1 Select a folder from the folder list. To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing î . 2 Select a thumbnail. ⢠Use î PREV and î NEXT to display the previous/next page of thumbnails. 3 Select âÂÂStart Slideshowâ or âÂÂStart Audio Slideshowâ from the menu. When you select âÂÂStart Audio SlideshowâÂÂ, you are prompted to select the Genre of music you would like to hear, and when you press ENTER , music of that Genre stored on the Jukebox will be played during the slideshow. For more information on adding music to the HDD, see Using the Jukebox on page 87. ⢠You can also select a file or folder then press î PLAY to start playing the slideshow. ⢠Use î PREV/ î NEXT to display the previous/next picture, or î PAUSE to pause the slideshow. HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Currently selected thumbnail Pages in file list HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU File Style 12 Files Display Mode The View Options panel ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 11 94 En ⢠Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and right. ⢠Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. This is normal. 4 Press to return to the thumbnail. ⢠You can also use the RETURN button. 5 Press to exit the PhotoViewer. Zooming an image During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed. 1 Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 2 Use to move the zoomed area. Rotating an image You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. ⢠Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90ú. Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90ú. Reloading files from a disc or USB device If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function. 1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list (âÂÂRead next: ...âÂÂ). 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc or connected USB device (USB function only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR- 550H-S). It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in the images. 1 Importing files to the HDD You can import files and save them to the HDD 2 from a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera (USB function only works with DVR- 650H-S and DVR-550H-S). Once on the HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print them out if youâÂÂve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer (USB function only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR- 550H-S). 1 Select the location of folders/ files you want to import. To import a whole folder, select the desired folder, press î , and skip to step 3 below. ⢠To import multiple folders, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 2 Select a file to import, then press î . . . . ⢠To import multiple files, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. STOP HOME MENU ENTER ANGLE Note 1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.) 2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW. ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 95 En 11 3 Select âÂÂCopy to HDDâ from the menu. 4 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm and copy the folder(s)/file(s), or â Noâ to cancel. ⢠The files will be copied to the HDD with the same folder structure as the original. ⢠Importing to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder). Selecting multiple files or folders The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files at once for importing or editing. 1 Select the folder containing the files you want to import. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂMulti-Modeâ from the menu. 4 Select files/folders from the list. An orange check mark box ( î ) is shown by the item you selected. A blue check mark box ( î ) appears on the folder select screen when files from that folder are selected. 5 Display the command menu. 6 Select the command you want to apply to all the selected items. ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer CD/DVD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Copy all to HDD Copy to HDD Print Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow New Folder Folder Options Copy to DVD Multi-Mode ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Multi-Mode ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 11 96 En Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW ( DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) Using this feature you can copy all the files 1 (including audio and movie files) stored on a connected USB camera to a recordable DVD disc. A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatically finalized. Important ⢠Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that has already been initialized for Video mode recording but has nothing yet recorded on it. Discs that have already been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot be used. ⢠After backing up the pictures in your digital camera to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been recorded properly before deleting anything from the camera. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPhotoViewerâ to display the PhotoViewer screen. 2 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. 3 Select âÂÂCopy Files from a Digital Cameraâ from the menu. 4 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. ⢠Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operations are possible. Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW This feature allows you just to copy some of the files stored on HDD to a DVD. A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD player (copying selected files doesnâÂÂt automatically finalize the disc). Important â¢A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded. ⢠One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files. If there are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple slideshows are created on the disc. ⢠If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the slideshow will become unplayable but the free space will not increase. 1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. 2 Select âÂÂView/Edit Photos on the HDDâ from the menu. 3 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. ⢠Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. Note 1⢠There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data you can copy at one time. ⢠Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW. View/Edit Photos on the HDD View Photos on a USB Device Copy Files from a Digital Camera View Photos on a CD/DVD ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 97 En 11 ⢠To copy multiple folders, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 4 Select âÂÂCopy to DVDâ from the menu. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. ⢠Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR . File names will be PHOT number. ⢠Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operation is possible. ⢠While âÂÂCancelâ is displayed, you can press ENTER to cancel. Editing files on the HDD There are a number of commands you can use to edit and organize your pictures stored on the HDD. Creating a new folder 1 From the folder list, display the menu. 2 Select âÂÂNew FolderâÂÂ. The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the name F_ number . ⢠There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD. Erasing a file or folder 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to erase. ⢠To erase multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. ⢠Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it. Please be careful! ⢠You canâÂÂt erase files that have been locked. ⢠Folders containing locked files canâÂÂt be erased. Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂFile Optionsâ or âÂÂFolder OptionsâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂEraseâ or âÂÂErase FolderâÂÂ. ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow New Folder Folder Options Copy to DVD Multi-Mode ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 11 98 En 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. ⢠You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm. Copying files 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. ⢠Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. ⢠To copy multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂFile Optionsâ or âÂÂFolder OptionsâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂCopyâ or âÂÂCopy Folder ContentsâÂÂ. 5 Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s) to. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. ⢠Copying to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD. Naming files and folders 1 Select the file or folder you want to rename. You canâÂÂt rename files that have been locked. 2 Select âÂÂFile Optionsâ or âÂÂFolder OptionsâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂRename Fileâ or âÂÂRename FolderâÂÂ. 4 Enter a new name for the file/folder. File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters long. See Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name and Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 71 for how to enter a name. Locking/Unlocking files Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure and prevent them from being renamed. Use the same process to both lock and unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a padlock icon. ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 99 En 11 1 Select the file(s) you want to lock (or unlock). ⢠To lock/unlock multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂFile Optionsâ or âÂÂFolder OptionsâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂLockâ or âÂÂLock Folder ContentsâÂÂ. Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them. To remove all locks within a given folder, choose âÂÂFolder Optionâ > âÂÂUnlock Folder Contentsâ . To view detailed information This feature allows you to check the settings of the camera from which you imported the photos. 1 Choose the file for which you would like to see detailed information. 2 Choose âÂÂDetailed InformationâÂÂ. When no detailed information is available, nothing is displayed. Printing files ( DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB port will enable you to print out picture files 1 stored on the HDD, a CD/DVD or directly from a digital camera. Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder before starting. 1 Select the file(s) you want to print. ⢠To print multiple files, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂPrintâ from the menu. 4 Select âÂÂStartâ to confirm, or âÂÂCancelâ to cancel. ⢠Once printing has started, you can cancel by pressing ENTER . Tip ⢠Paper size and layout can be set; the options available depend on your printer â check the printer manual for details. ⢠This recorder may not work correctly with all printers. ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel Note 1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly. ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 99 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 12 100 En Chapter 12 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu. Basic settings Input Disc Name When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 . You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂBasicâ > âÂÂInput Disc Nameâ > âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 3 Input a name for the disc. The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD R/ RW. ⢠See Title Name on page 70 for more on navigating the input screen. Lock Disc ⢠Default setting: Off Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc. Important â¢A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂBasicâ > âÂÂLock Discâ then âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOffâÂÂ. Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off . DVD-RW Auto Initialize ⢠Default setting: VR Mode Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 51 for detailed instructions. DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. Basic Input Disc Name Next Screen Input Disc Name ENTER DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. Basic On Off Lock Disc DVD-RW DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 100 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 101 En 12 Initialize settings You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either VR mode or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see page 51). New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize them for VR mode recording. 1 DVD RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR mode. See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 50 for detailed instructions. Finalize settings Finalize Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. It is also possible to finalize DVD RW discs. This is only necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu for the disc. See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 49 for detailed instructions. Undo Finalize You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂFinalizeâ > âÂÂUndo Finalizeâ then âÂÂStartâÂÂ. Optimize HDD As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need optimizing to âÂÂclean upâ all the fragmented files. When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will automatically display a message recommending optimization. Important ⢠Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours. During optimization, playback and recording are not possible. ⢠Cancelling optimization mid-way does not undo the optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly optimized. Note 1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording. DVD-R DVD-RW DVD RW DVD-RAM DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RW HOME MENU ENTER HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 101 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 12 102 En 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂOptimize HDDâ then âÂÂStartâÂÂ. A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. If no actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself off. Initialize HDD When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂInitialize HDDâ then âÂÂStartâÂÂ. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Optimize HDD Optimize HDD Start Optimize HDD HDD HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Initialize HDD Optimize HDD Start Initialize HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 102 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video Adjust menu 103 En 13 Chapter 13 The Video Adjust menu Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording. Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. Choosing a preset 1 With the recorder stopped, press to display the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂVideo AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Select a preset. ⢠Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs. ⢠Use the î PREV /î NEXT buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: ⢠Tuner â suitable for general TV broadcasts ⢠VCR â suitable for video cassettes ⢠DTV/LDP â suitable for digital broadcasts and Laserdiscs ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( Tuner , VCR or DTV/LDP ). Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Select the setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Detailed Settings 2ch T uner ENTER Detailed Settings 2ch Memory1 ENTER Memory1 3-D Y/C Motion Still PureCinma Prog. Motion Auto Motion Still 2ch Detail CNR YNR White AGC Off Max Off Off Max Max Off DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 103 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video Adjust menu 13 104 En ⢠Prog. Motion â Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. ⢠PureCinema â This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto , but try switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural. ⢠3-D Y/C â Adjusts the brightness/colour separation. ⢠YNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. ⢠CNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White AGC â Turn on for automatic white level adjustment. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (525 Input Line System only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colours appear. 4 Adjust the currently selected setting. 5 Press to exit. You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs. Choosing a preset 1 With a disc playing (or paused), press to display the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂVideo AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Select a setting. There are six presets available: ⢠TV â suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs ⢠PDP â suitable for plasma display screens ⢠Professional â suitable for professional monitors ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( TV , PDP or Professional ). ENTER HOME MENU HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Detailed Settings TV DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 104 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video Adjust menu 105 En 13 Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Move the cursor down and select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠Prog. Motion â Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.) ⢠PureCinema â This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2 , On or Off if the picture appears unnatural. ⢠YNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. ⢠BNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of flat colour, caused by MPEG compression). ⢠MNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG compression). ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements in the picture. Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. White Level is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. Black Level is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level. Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Gamma Correction â Adjusts the brightness of darker images. Gamma Correction is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. Hue is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colours appear. Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Detailed Settings Memory1 Memory1 YNR Motion Still PureCinma Prog. Motion Auto1 Off Max BNR MNR Max Max Off Off Sharpness Detail Fine Soft Fine Soft DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 105 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 106 En Chapter 14 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SetupâÂÂ. In the table below, the default option is marked with a â¢. Setting Options Explanation Basic Clock Setting Auto Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically . Manual ⢠If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set the time and date manually . Display Set preferences for time and date display format. The clock must be set in order to use timer recording. Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or P AL-60 recording from an external input. 625 System Use for standard P AL or SECAM recording. Taiwan and Philippines model: Default setting is 525 System . Other: Default setting is 625 System . See also About the input line system on page 117 for more information on this setting. Power Save (except Taiwan and Philippines model) On No antenna input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in standby . Off ⢠When the recorder is in standby , all signals arriving at the antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs. HELP Setting On ⢠Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. Off Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (P ress HELP on the remote to manually display the Help screen.) Setup Navigator Start Select to start the Setup Navigator . See also Switching on and setting up on page 30 . DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 106 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 107 En 14 T uner Auto Channel Setting (Taiwan and Philippines model) Antenna ⢠Select if you receive channels from an antenna. It takes a few moments for the auto tuning to complete. Cable Select if you receive channels via cable. It takes a few moments for the auto tuning to complete. Auto Channel Setting (Other) Next Screen P roceed to the next screen, select your countr y , then wait for automatic tuning to complete. The channel mapping screen should appear when the recorder is set up. P ress ENTER to exit this screen. Manual CH Setting Next Screen P roceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your countr y , then proceed to the manual channel setting screen: ⢠Change channel presets using the î PREV / î NEXT buttons. ⢠T o skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On . ⢠Set the CH System setting to match the channel system of your countr y or region ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). ⢠Set the Channel setting to the channel you want to assign to the current channel preset ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). ⢠T o manually ï¬Âne tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then adjust the Level setting. ⢠Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ) . ⢠The Name ï¬Âeld allows you to input a name of up to ï¬Âve characters for the current channel preset ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). Channel Swapping (except Taiwan and Philippines model) Next Screen P roceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together . Select two presets to swap then press ENTER . G-Code CH Setting Next Screen P roceed to the next screen to assign channel numbers to the guide channels as necessar y . Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers should be assigned to which guide channels. P ress ENTER when your done to leave this screen. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 107 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 108 En Video In/Out Input Colour System Next Screen P roceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input and the built-in TV tuner . Use the CH /â buttons to change the preset. On the default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is P AL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or P AL -60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly . See also About the input colour system on page 117 for more information on this setting. Component Video Out Interlace ⢠Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video. Progressive Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if youâÂÂre not sure. ⢠If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive , you will not be able to see any picture at all . In this case, press î OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the î (Stop) button on the front panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 114 to the default setting). ⢠When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT . NTSC on P AL TV On NTSC discs will play correctly on P AL-only TVs. Off ⢠Use if your TV is already NTSC -compatible. Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 117 for related information. Audio In NICAM Select (except Taiwan and Philippines model) NICAM ⢠Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. Regular Audio R ecord the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (Y ou can still switch the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.) T uner Level (except Taiwan and Philippines model) Normal ⢠Standard setting. Compression Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion. External Audio Stereo ⢠Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo. Dual Mono/ Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack. When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or dual mono/bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 108 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 109 En 14 Dual Mono Recording (Taiwan and Philippines model) L ⢠Select to record the left channel of an external dual mono source when recording to DVD in Video mode, to HDD with HDD Recording F ormat set to V ideo Mode On, or in LPCM mode. R As above, but for right channel recording. When recording dual mono audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback. Bilingual Recording (Other) A/L ⢠Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD with HDD Recording F ormat set to Video Mode On , to DVD in Video mode or in LPCM mode, from an external source. B/R As above, but for right (B) channel recording. When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback. DV Input Stereo 1 ⢠Select to use the âÂÂliveâ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Stereo 2 Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Mix Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks. Audio Out Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital ⢠Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played. Dolby Digital î PCM Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesnâÂÂt have a Dolby Digital decoder . DTS Out On ⢠Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played. Off Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when your connected equipment doesnâÂÂt have a DTS decoder . In this case, use the analog audio outputs. 96 kHz PCM Out 96 kHz î 48 kHz ⢠Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected equipment doesnâÂÂt support 96 kHz sampling rate. 96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 109 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 110 En MPEG Out MPEG Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being played. MPEG î PCM ⢠Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesnâÂÂt have an MPEG audio decoder . Audio DRC On Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume. Off ⢠Switches off Audio DRC. Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital . Language OSD Language ⢠(Taiwan and Philippines model) Sets the language of the on-screen displays to Chinese. English ⢠(Other) Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on- screen displays. Audio Language Chinese ⢠(Taiwan and Philippines model) Sets the default audio language for DVD- Video playback to Chinese. English ⢠(Other) Sets the default audio language for DVD- Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVD- Video playback. Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 118. Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 110 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 111 En 14 Subtitle Language Chinese ⢠(Taiwan and Philippines model) Sets the default subtitle language for DVD- Video playback to Chinese. English ⢠(Other) Sets the default subtitle language for DVD- Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for DVD- Video playback. Other Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 118. Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference. Auto Language On ⢠On this setting: ⢠DVD- Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will play using that language, without subtitles. ⢠Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with subtitles. Off Select to play DVD- Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language preferences. For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language. DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle Language ⢠Sets the language of DVD- Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language. English Sets the language of DVD- Video menus to English. available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD- Video menus. Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 118. Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language. Subtitle Display On ⢠Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences. Off Select to switch off subtitle display . Assist Subtitle Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available. Some discs may override these settings. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 111 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 112 En Recording Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32 , LPCM and XP modes can be set. Off ⢠Just the standard recording modes ( XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP and SEP ) can be set. See also Manual recording modes on page 120 for detailed information on manual recording levels. Optimized Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to ï¬Ât on to the selected media if it will not ï¬Ât at the selected quality setting. If the recording will not ï¬Ât even at MN1 ( MN4 for DVD R/ RW), then the recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected. Off ⢠When a timer recording is set that wonâÂÂt ï¬Ât on to the selected media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible. Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. Set Thumbnail 0 seconds ⢠Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the ï¬Ârst frame of the title. 30 seconds Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title. 3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title. Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) On ⢠When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD, chapter marks are added at the black screen between commercials and main programming. When recording in DV , chapter marks can be changed by date/time. Off Automatic chapter marking is switched off . Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off . 10 minutes ⢠When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted ever y 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted ever y 15 minutes. This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs. Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off . 10 minutes ⢠When recording in DVD R/ RW or in real-time copying, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted ever y 15 minutes. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 112 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 113 En 14 HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you donâÂÂt need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW . Video Mode On ⢠Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW as high-speed copy can be used. ⢠Taiwan and Philippines model: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a broadcast with a SAP channel. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Dual Mono Recording on page 109. ⢠Other: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 109. ⢠When the recording mode is set to XP , you cannot change HDD Recording Format. Playback TV Screen Size 4:3 (Letter Box) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format presentation for widescreen material. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presentation for widescreen material. 16:9 ⢠Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV . Y our TV settings determine how 4:3 material will look. Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override this setting. Still Picture Field P roduces a stable, generally shake-free image. Frame P roduces sharp image, but may be prone to shake. Auto ⢠Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image. Seamless Playback On Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit points. Off ⢠Y ou may notice momentar y interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Play List. This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 113 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 114 En Parental Lock Set Password In order to change the parental lock level or change the countr y/area code, set the password using this option. F rom the following screen, enter a four-digit number that will be your password. Change Password In order to change the password, ï¬Ârst enter your existing password and then a new one from the following screen. Change Level F rom the following screen, ï¬Ârst enter your password and then set a parental lock level. Country/Area Code F rom the following screen, ï¬Ârst enter your password and then set a countr y/area code. See Country/Area code list on page 131. Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 134. Angle Indicator On ⢠A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD- Video disc. Off Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing. HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) Screen Resolution 1920 x 1080p Constant 1920 x 1080p output. 1920 x 1080i Constant 1920 x 1080i output. 1280 x 720p Constant 1280 x 720p output. 720 x 576p (720 x 480p) Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input Line System to 525 System , video is output in 720 x 480p). 720 x 576i (720 x 480i) Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input Line System to 525 System , video is output in 720 x 480i). ⢠If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press î OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the î (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 108 to the default setting). ⢠If you have the Colour set to YCbCr 4:2:2 , you cannot select 720 x 576i (720 x 480i) . 4:3 Video Output Full Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio. Normal Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on each side. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 114 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 115 En 14 Colour RGB (0âÂÂ255) Use if colours are weak and black appears to â ï¬Âoatâ on the RGB (16âÂÂ235) setting. RGB (16âÂÂ235) Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the RGB (0âÂÂ255) setting. YCbCr 4:2:2 The video signal is output as a 10-bit Y CbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is the standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices. YCbCr 4:4:4 The video signal is output as a 8-bit Y CbCr 4:4:4 component signal. ⢠Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available. ⢠When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available. ⢠You cannot choose YCbCr 4:2:2 when the Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 576i (720 x 480i). Audio Output Auto ⢠Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal. However , depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMI- connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output. PCM All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS). Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio. This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected . HDMI Control On ⢠Enable the HDMI Control function. Select this option when connected to an HDMI Control-compatible P ioneer plasma display , AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.). Off Disable the HDMI Control function. Select this option when not connected to an HDMI Control-compatible component, or when connected to a component manufactured by a company other than P ioneer . ⢠For more information about HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 22. ⢠This setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device. ⢠For more information see Troubleshooting on page 126. Options On Screen Display On ⢠The recorder displays operation displays ( Stop , Play , etc.) on-screen. Off Switches off the on-screen operation displays. Front Panel Display On ⢠The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby . Off The front panel display is switched off in standby . Setting Options Explanation 14 Initial_Settings.fm 115 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 116 En Remote Control Mode Recorder 1âÂÂ3 (default: Recorder 1) If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID, press and hold RETURN then press 1 , 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a recorder with the same ID. DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder âÂÂs DivX registration code. See DivX video compatibility on page 10 and DivXî VOD content on page 11. Set Preview (HDD only) Quick Preview ⢠When in the Disc Navigator , the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally from the beginning.) Normal The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title. Options 2 USB (DVR-650H-S/ DVR-550H-S only) Restart USB Device If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder , tr y using this option to restart it. If the device still does not work properly tr y switching it off then back on, and/or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable. Conï¬Ârm Printer Use this option to conï¬Ârm the make and model of the printer connected to the recorder (does not work with all printers). HDD Sleep Mode Proceed P uts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound quality . When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load. The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions, including: ⢠Turning the power off and on again. ⢠Pressing the HDD/DVD button and choosing the HDD. ⢠When a timer recording begins. ⢠When you try and make any changes to system settings. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 116 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 117 En 14 Additional information about the TV system settings About the input line system This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input Colour System settings determine how the recorder treats incoming video signals from an external input or the built-in TV tuner. Please note the following points when changing the input line system: ⢠If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel î (Stop) button then pressing INPUT SELECT (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. ⢠When you switch the Input Line System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the î (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT buttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care. ⢠You canâÂÂt mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc. ⢠When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (page 117). About NTSC on PAL TV Depending on the Input Line System setting and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. About the input colour system The available options of the Input Colour System setting depend on the Input Line System setting. The tables below show the different options available. Input Line System NTSC on P AL TV Output when stopped 625 System Off PAL On PAL 525 System Off NTSC On PALâÂÂ60 Taiwan and Philippines model: Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System n/a Auto PAL SECAM 525 System 3.58 NTSC Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 117 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 118 En Additional information about component video output If you switch the Component Video Out setting to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and hold the î (Stop) button on the front panel, then press î OPEN/CLOSE . This will set the recorderâÂÂs video output back to Interlace . Selecting other languages for language options 1 Select âÂÂOtherâ from the language list. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 2 Select the language you want. ⢠Select by language name: Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the language. ⢠Select by code number: Press î then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 131 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes. Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model: Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System n/a Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 Other: Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System 3.58 NTSC Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 ENTER ENTER Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Initial Setup OSD Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display DVD Menu Language DVD Menu Language Language Number English 0 5 1 4 Language DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 118 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 119 En 15 Chapter 15 Additional information Minimum copying times The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video. Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. 1 Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility. Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. *1 Titles recorded on DVD R/ RW in SEP , SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied. Note 1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed). Rec mode SEP SLP EP LP SP XP DVD disc type 10 h 8 h 6 h 4 h 2 h 1 h DVD-R / 1x DVD-RW / 1x 1x 6 mins. 7.5 mins. 10 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. 60 mins. DVD-RW / 2x DVD-R DL DVD-RAM / 2x 2x 3 mins. 4 mins. 5 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. DVD R / 2.4x DVD RW / 2.4x DVD R DL 2.4x *1 *1 *1 6.3 mins. 12.5 mins. 25 mins. DVD-RAM / 3x DVD-RAM / 5x 3x 2 mins. 2.5 mins. 3.5 mins. 5 mins. 10 mins. 20 mins. DVD-R / 4x DVD-RW / 4x DVD R / 4x DVD RW / 4x 4x 1.5 mins. *1 2 mins. *1 2.5 mins. *1 4 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. DVD-R / 8x / 16x DVD R / 8x / 16x DVD-RW / 6x DVD RW / 8x 6x 1.25 mins. *1 1.6 mins. *1 2.2 mins. *1 3 mins. 5.5 mins. 11 mins. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 119 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 120 En Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording time on the HDD, see Specifications on page 135. *1 Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes. *2 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System. *3 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD R/ RW. *4 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD R/ RW. *5 XP mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode. Rec. time *1 Resolution *2 Level Single-Layer DVD: DVD-R/-RW DVD R/ RW DVD-RAM Dual-Layer DVD: DVD-R DL DVD R DL Video mode Off (HDD) VR mode (DVD-R/-RW) DVD-RAM VR mode (DVD-R DL) Video mode On (HDD) Video mode (DVD-R/-RW) DVD R/ RW Video mode (DVD-R DL) DVD R DL MN 1 *3,4 802 mins. 1440 mins. 352 x 240 / 352 x 288 352 x 240 / 352 x 288 MN 2 *3,4 720 mins. 1292 mins. MN 3 *3,4 SEP 600 mins. 1077 mins. MN 4 *4 SLP 480 mins. 861 mins. MN 5 *4 420 mins. 754 mins. MN 6 *4 EP 360 mins. 646 mins. MN 7 300 mins. 538 mins. 352 x 480 / 352 x 576 352 x 480 / 352 x 576 MN 8 270 mins. 484 mins. MN 9 LP 240 mins. 431 mins. 480 x 480 / 480 x 576 720 x 480 / 720 x 576 MN 10 230 mins. 413 mins. MN 11 220 mins. 395 mins. MN 12 210 mins. 377 mins. 544 x 480 / 544 x 576 MN 13 200 mins. 359 mins. MN 14 190 mins. 341 mins. MN 15 180 mins. 323 mins. MN 16 170 mins. 305 mins. 720 x 480 / 720 x 576 MN 17 160 mins. 287 mins. MN 18 150 mins. 269 mins. MN 19 140 mins. 251 mins. MN 20 130 mins. 233 mins. MN 21 SP 120 mins. 215 mins. MN 22 110 mins. 197 mins. MN 23 105 mins. 188 mins. MN 24 100 mins. 179 mins. MN 25 95 mins. 170 mins. MN 26 90 mins. 161 mins. MN 27 85 mins. 153 mins. MN 28 80 mins. 144 mins. MN 29 75 mins. 135 mins. MN 30 70 mins. 126 mins. MN 31 65 mins. 117 mins. MN 32 XP 61 mins. 111 mins. LPCM 61 mins. 111 mins. XP *5 --- mins. --- mins. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 120 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 121 En 15 ⢠Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. ⢠Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format. ⢠See also Recording on page 33. Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. General Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray ⢠Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label- side up). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 133). ⢠Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder . CanâÂÂt eject a disc ⢠T urn off the power to this device and press and hold î OPEN/CLOSE on the front of the unit for more than three seconds. CanâÂÂt play a disc ⢠Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 7). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 133). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label- side up). ⢠P ress HDD/DVD to select the DVD. ⢠There may be condensation in the recorder . Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. ⢠During HDD recording, you canâÂÂt play discs that are recorded with a Line System different to the current recorder setting. ⢠DVD R/ RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy- once protected recordings will not play in this recorder . CanâÂÂt r ecord a disc ⢠Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7). ⢠Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 50). This can take up to an hour . No picture ⢠Check that ever ything is connected properly (page 14). ⢠Check that the connected TV and/or the A V amp/receiver is set to the correct input. ⢠The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV . Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel î (Stop) button then pressing î OPEN/CLOSE . ⢠When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT . DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 121 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 122 En All settings are r eset ⢠If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. ⢠Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord. Remote control does not work ⢠If you connected this recorder to another P ioneer product using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 14). ⢠Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 116). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1 .) ⢠Use the remote within its operating range (page 6). ⢠Replace the batteries (page 6). No sound or sound is distorted ⢠Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. ⢠There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play . P ress î PLAY to resume regular playback. ⢠DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver . If you have connected a suitable decoder , also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Out setting is On . ⢠Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog. ⢠Check the audio cable connections (page 14). ⢠If the sound is distorted, tr y cleaning the cable plugs. Cannot switch a dual mono/bilingual programme ⢠During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub channels are both output. The picture is distorted ⢠Change the Input Line System setting (page 117). (Y ou can also change it by pressing the î (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.) The picture fr om the external input is distorted ⢠If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder . Connect the component directly to your TV . Screen is str etched vertically or horizontally ⢠Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 113) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 132). ⢠If you have a widescreen TV , check its aspect ratio settings. ⢠This recorder âÂÂs input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. Problem Remedy DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 122 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 123 En 15 CanâÂÂt play a disc recor ded using this recor der on another player ⢠If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R , make sure that itâÂÂs ï¬Ânalized (page 49). ⢠Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R and ï¬Ânalized. ⢠If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be speciï¬Âcally RW compatible in order to play it (page 7). ⢠Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non- CPRM compatible players (page 35). ⢠DVD RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again. During playback the picture is dark or distorted ⢠When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR , the picture will not display correctly . Connect the recorder directly to your TV . Recorded contents ar e not clear or artefacts appear in areas of ï¬Âat colour (due to MPEG compression; also known as block noise ) ⢠Change the recording mode to XP / SP . CanâÂÂt r ecord or does not recor d successfully ⢠Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD. ⢠F or a DVD -R/-RW (V ideo mode) or DVD R, check that the disc isn âÂÂt already ï¬Ânalized. ⢠Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc: â HDD: 999 titles â VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc â Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title â DVD R/ RW : 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc) ⢠Check that the source you are tr ying to record is not copy protected. ⢠F or a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isnâÂÂt locked (page 100). ⢠Check that you are recording with the same TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessar y to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 117). ⢠The power may have failed during recording. Timer programme doesnâÂÂt r ecord successfully ⢠When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder âÂÂs built-in TV tuner , not the TV âÂÂs built-in tuner . ⢠When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW , programmes that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 35). ⢠T wo timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely . ⢠The power may have failed during recording. ⢠Check that the recorder âÂÂs TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) settings are the same as the channel set for recording. Problem Remedy DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 123 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 124 En After brieï¬Ây unplugging or after a power failure the fr ont panel display shows âÂÂ--:--â â¢ A backup batter y inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder . Af ter unplugging or a power failure, the batter y keeps all settings for some ï¬Âve years from the date it was shipped from the factor y . Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. ⢠T o have the batter y replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneer - authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. Front panel display shows âÂÂLOCKEDâ when a button is pressed ⢠The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 46). CanâÂÂt use One T ouch Copy (HDD to DVD) ⢠Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or a DVD R , the disc isnâÂÂt ï¬Ânalized. ⢠Make sure there is a recordable DVD R/ RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc. ⢠If you delete a title from a DVD R/ RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles may not decrease. ⢠F urther recording is not possible on a ï¬Ânalized DVD R . Check that there isnâÂÂt a disc menu on the disc youâÂÂre trying to use. ⢠If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One T ouch Copy will not work. ⢠If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP mode, the One T ouch Copy feature canâÂÂt be used. ⢠One T ouch Copy canâÂÂt be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD R/ RW (though you can use a DVD R DL). ⢠One T ouch Copy canâÂÂt be used for MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP titles when copying to DVD R/ RW . ⢠One T ouch Copy doesnâÂÂt work if the recorder is already recording to DVD. CanâÂÂt use One T ouch Copy (DVD to HDD) ⢠Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD. ⢠One T ouch Copy doesnâÂÂt work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD. The device connected to the USB port is not recognized (DVR-650H-S/ DVR-550H-S only) ⢠Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 24). ⢠Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length. ⢠Check that the USB cable is inserted fully . ⢠Check that the USB device is powered on. ⢠T r y switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on. ⢠T r y using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu (page 116). ⢠If several USB devices (camera, USB memor y , card reader , etc.) are connected at the same time, itâÂÂs possible that only the ï¬Ârst device connected to this recorder will be recognized. File names are not displayed properly . ⢠Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on this unit. Problem Remedy 15 Additional_Information.fm 124 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 125 En 15 HDMI Problem Remedy The connected HDMI or DVI device does not display any picture (and the front panel HDMI indicator does not light) ⢠T r y disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components is on). ⢠T r y switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on. ⢠T r y switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder . Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder . ⢠When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following: â The connected deviceâÂÂs video input is set correctly for this unit. â The cable youâÂÂre using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non- standard cable may result in no picture being output. â DonâÂÂt use several HDMI cables connected together . Use a single cable to connect devices together . ⢠When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following: â The connected deviceâÂÂs video input is set correctly for this unit. â The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP -compatible. â The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and P AL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input. ⢠If the recorder âÂÂs internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output. ⢠Not all HDCP -compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder . No video from the HDMI output ⢠If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press î OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the î (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 108 to the default setting). Thereâ s no sound fr om the connected HDMI or DVI device ⢠There is no sound when using a DVI terminal. ⢠Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came with the connected device). The power automatically turns on ⢠This unitâÂÂs power may be turned on each time you turn on the power for a connected plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be turned on in this way , set this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control to OFF (page 115). CanâÂÂt r ecord video ⢠When using HDMI Control to record, you must make sure that the channel information for the plasma television matches that of this unit. If the channel information does not match you cannot make recordings. Use the Auto Channel Setting function to set this unitâÂÂs channel information (page 107). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 125 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 126 En If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working ⢠Press î (Stop) then try restarting playback. ⢠Press the front panel î STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold î STANDBY/ON for five seconds until the power switches off. HDMI Control does not respond ⢠V erify that the HDMI cable is ï¬Ârmly connected (page 21). ⢠Make sure that this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control is set to ON (page 115). ⢠Make sure that the connected componentâÂÂs HDMI Control is set to ON. F or more information, refer to the operating manual of your plasma television or AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.). ⢠This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders connected to a single plasma television or AV system. F or more information refer to the operating manual of your plasma television or AV system. ⢠Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, change connection settings, turn this unitâÂÂs power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected component. If you experience any problems, turn the HDMI control for all connected units ON and check the video output from this unit. ⢠Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or not. ⢠Certain functions are not supported on with plasma televisions. ⢠W e cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Control- compatible components other than those made by P ioneer . When using HDMI-Control compatible components manufactured by companies other than P ioneer , set the HDMI Control to Off (page 115). ⢠This unit will not function properly with AV systems that do not support HDMI Control, or when connected with AV systems other than those made by P ioneer . Problem Remedy HDD/DVD DivX COPY OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ST ANDBY/ON DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 126 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 127 En 15 On-screen displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. Message Explanation/Action ⢠Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it. ⢠Incompatible region number . The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play . ⢠Cannot recor d any more titles. ⢠No more space for ï¬Âle management data. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine chapters. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. Undo the ï¬Ânalization. The disc was ï¬Ânalized on a non-P ioneer DVD recorder . Undo the ï¬Ânalization in order to recording/editing. ⢠Cannot play this disc. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. ⢠Cannot read the CPRM information. ⢠Could not recor d the information to the disc. ⢠Cannot edit. ⢠Could not initialize disc. ⢠Could not complete ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not undo ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not successfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. T ake out the disc, clean it and retr y . If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. ⢠Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. ⢠Cannot recor d to a disc that is not CPRM compatible. ⢠Cannot recor d this content using Video mode recor ding. ⢠This video cannot be recor ded to DVD R/ RW . The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording. ⢠This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. ⢠Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damaged â please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 127 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 128 En ⢠Repairing disc. ⢠Repairing the HDD. During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored. ⢠Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost. ⢠Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLA Y to clear message. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest P ioneer- authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. ⢠HDD optimization is recommended. This can be done using Disc Setup. The HDD should be optimized (basically , HDD housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording per formance. ⢠Please perform HDD optimization. This can be done using Disc Setup. The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain per formance. ⢠The HDD has not been sufï¬Âciently optimized. Please optimize again. If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization to complete properly . Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize again. ⢠An error occurr ed. Please consult the service center . Note that contents on the HDD may be erased when servicing this unit . . . . This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. ⢠The Hard Disk Drive info is incorr ect. Use the Disc Setup menu to reinitialize. As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 102) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected ï¬Âles. ⢠There is no DV input or the input signal is unrecor dable. No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder . ⢠No DV camcorder connected. The camcorder is not connected properly , or the camcorder is switched off . ⢠Y ou cannot connect mor e than one DV camcorder at a time. This recorder âÂÂs DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder . ⢠Cannot operate the DV camcorder . This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder . Tr y switching off the camcorder then turn it back on again. Message Explanation/Action DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 128 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 129 En 15 Front-panel displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. ⢠Could not operate the DV camcorder . This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder . ⢠The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder . The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode. ⢠The printer is not ready or is not connected. Please check the printer . This message is displayed when communication could not be established with the printer . See the Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause. ⢠Printing has been cancelled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error , either reconnect the printer and start the printing job again , or select âÂÂY esâ to resume printing (select âÂÂNoâ to cancel the print job). See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of print errors. Message Explanation/Action ⢠E01 The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. ⢠E02 As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 102) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected ï¬Âles. Message Explanation/Action 15 Additional_Information.fm 129 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 130 En Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. The LED indicator on the remote controls lights. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table below, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2 Press î TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does î TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TV âÂÂs video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels Maker Code Alba 66 Bush 76 Fisher 61, 65 F ujitsu 77 F unai 67 Goldstar 79 Grandiente 87 Grundig 51, 82 Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86 IT T 70 Mitsubishi 59 Nokia 53, 81 P anasonic 58, 72 Philips 57, 85, 89 P ioneer 50, 80 RCA 68 Salora 71 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 74 Sei 78 Sharp 52 Sony 54 T andy 69 T elefunken 64 Thomson 62, 89 T oshiba 55 JVC 63 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 130 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 131 En 15 Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code , Code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Greek (el), 0512 Polish (pl), 1612 Czech (cs), 0319 Norwegian (no), 1415 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Korean (ko), 1115 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laotian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 131 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 132 En Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the programme are cropped so that the picture ï¬Âlls the whole screen. 4:3 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The programme is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The programme is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine how the picture is presented â check the manual that came with the TV for details. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 132 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 133 En 15 Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a circular motion. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When youâÂÂre not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). DonâÂÂt glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the recorder. Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, donâÂÂt risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder. This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The HDD/DVD recorderâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 133 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 134 En Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference â especially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth â this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press î STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording â discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold î (Stop) and press î STANDBY/ ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 134 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 135 En 15 Specifications General Power requirements Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption DVR-650H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 W DVR-550H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 W DVR-450H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 W Power consumption in standby mode (Front panel display: off) Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.51 W Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.33 W Weight DVR-650H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 kg DVR-550H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 kg DVR-450H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 75 mm (H) x 288 mm (D) Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ðC to 35 ðC Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) TV system Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC Readable discs DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX) Recording discs and formats DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode DVD R/ RW: VR mode DVD-RAM: VR mode DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode DVD R DL: VR mode Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time HDD DVR-650H-S (250 GB) XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h to 711 h DVR-550H-S (160 GB) XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 h Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 h to 455 h DVR-450H-S (80 GB) XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 11 h Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 170 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 11 h to 227 h DVD-R/-RW, DVD R/ RW, DVD-RAM Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h (DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 13 h DVD R/ RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 8 h DVD-R DL/DVD R DL Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m (DVD-R DL only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h DVD R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m Timer Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes Clock Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (12-hour digital display 1 ) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display) Note 1 If the country is set to Philippines the clock switches to 24 hour display. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 135 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 136 En Tuner Receivable channels Taiwan and Philippines model: VHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ch to 13 ch UHF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ch to 69 ch CATV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 ch to C125 ch Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model : Taiwan, Philippines model : Other: Input/Output VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 ⦠(F-shape connector) Other . . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 ⦠(IEC connector) Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack Video Output 1, 2 Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack S-Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (colour) - Input level Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN S-Video Output 1, 2 Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (colour) - Output level Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN Component video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 ⦠) P B , P R : 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Audio Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) L/R During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms (Input impedance: more than 22 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Audio Output 1, 2 L/R During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms (Output impedance: less than 1.5 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Other connections Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front) (i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard) USB (DVR-650H-S and DVR-550H-S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front) HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin Supplied accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating Instructions Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF Channel E2 to E4 X to Z E5 to E12 S1 to S20 M1 to M10 U1 to U10 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequency 47 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz Channel A to C X to Z D to J 11, 13 S1 to S20 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequency 44 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM B/G P AL B/G PA L I Channel R1 â R5 R6 â R12 S1 â S20 S21 â S41 E21 â E69 Frequency 49 MHz to 94 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM D/K P AL D/K VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM Channel 2 to 13 14 to 69 C1 to C125 Frequency 55 MHz to 218 MHz 471 MHz to 808 MHz 72 MHz to 806 MHz NTSC-M/N STEREO M/N - BTSC VHF UHF CA TV VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF Channel E2 to E4 X to Z E5 to E12 S1 to S20 M1 to M10 U1 to U10 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequency 47 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz Channel A to C X to Z D to J 11, 13 S1 to S20 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequency 44 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM B/G P AL B/G PA L I Channel 2 to 13 14 to 69 C1 to C125 Frequency 55 MHz to 218 MHz 471 MHz to 808 MHz 72 MHz to 806 MHz NTSC-M/N Channel R1 â R5 R6 â R12 S1 â S20 S21 â S41 E21 â E69 Frequency 49 MHz to 94 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM D/K P AL D/K STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM M/N - BTSC VHF UHF CA TV VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF This product includes F ontAvenue î fonts licenced by NEC Corporation. F ontA venue is a r egistered trademark of NEC Corporation. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 136 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<VRB1463-A> Pr inted in China HDD/DVD Recorder DVR-650H-S DVR-550H-S DVR-450H-S Operating Instructions HDD/D VD RECORDER Operating Instructions P ublished by Pioneer Corporation . Copyright é 2007 P ioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En TM 00 Cover_back_TLTFWPW_EN.fm 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly . After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (ser vicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_En-A W ARNING This equipment is not waterproof. T o prevent a fir e or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A_En W ARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or r egion. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area wher e this unit will be used meets the requir ed voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the rear of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: inside of the unit D3-4-2-1-8_B_En CAUTION A TTENTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RA DI A TION WH EN OPE N, A VOI D E XPO SU RE T O T HE B EA M. VRW2262 - A RADIA TIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES D E CLAS SE 3B QU AND OU VERT . ÃÂV I TE Z TOUT EXPOSITION AU F AISCEAU. ADV ARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LA SERSTRàLING VED àBNING. UN DGàUDSÃÂTTELSE FOR STRàLING. V ARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OC H OSYNLIG LA SER ST RàLNING N ÃÂR DENNA DEL ÃÂR ÃÂPPNAD. UNDVIK AT T U T S àT TA DIG FÃÂR STRàLEN. V ARO! AVA TT AESSA OLET A L TTIINA NÃÂKYVÃÂLLE JA NÃÂKYMÃÂTTÃÂMÃÂLLE LUO KAN 3 B L ASERS àTEIL YLLE. ÃÂLàKA TSO S àTEESEEN. PRECAUCIÃÂN CUANDO SE ABRE HA Y RADIACIÃÂN LÃÂSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E I N V I S I B L E . E V I T E LA E X P O S I C I àN A LOS R AY O S L ÃÂSER. VORSICHT BEI GEÃÂFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SI CH TB AR E UND U NS I C HT BARE LAS ERST RAH LUN G DE R K LA SS E 3 B IM GE RàTEINNEREN V ORH AND EN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZE N! W ARNING To prevent a fire hazar d, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
CAUTION The ST ANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. T o avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 úC to 35 úC ( 41 úF to 95 úF); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En VENTILA TION CAUTION When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to impr ove heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear , and 10 cm at each side). W ARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are pr ovided for ventilation to ensure r eliable operation of the product, and to pr otect it from overheating. T o prevent fir e hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En POWER-CORD CAUTION Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized ser vice center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En For T aiwan exclusively T aiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
4 En Contents 01 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 12 Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13 02 Connections Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Using other types of video output . . . . . . 17 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 03 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 04 Getting started Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 30 05 Recording About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . 35 Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Setting the picture quality/ recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . 38 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . 50 DVD-RW Auto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 06 Playback Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . 58 The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . 60 Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DVR650HK_TLT_ENTOC.fm 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En 07 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 64 Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . 64 About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 08 Editing Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 09 Copying and backup Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 10 Using the Jukebox Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Copying files via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . 90 Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 11 The PhotoViewer Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Reloading files from a disc or USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Selecting multiple files or folders . . . . . . 95 Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . 96 Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 12 The Disc Setup menu Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 13 The Video Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 14 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 106 Selecting other languages for language options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 15 Additional information Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Front-panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 132 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 DVR650HK_TLT_ENTOC.fm 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 6 En Chapter 1 Before you start WhatâÂÂs in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it: ⢠Remote control ⢠AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 ⢠Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) ⢠RF antenna cable ⢠Power cable ⢠These operating instructions Putting the batteries in the remote control ⢠Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( î , î ) inside the compartment. Important Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: ⢠DonâÂÂt mix new and old batteries together. ⢠DonâÂÂt use different kinds of batteries together â although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. ⢠Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. ⢠Remove batteries from equipment that isnâÂÂt going to be used for a month or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâÂÂs rules that apply in your country or area. Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unitâÂÂs remote sensor. ⢠Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. ⢠When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 116. ⢠Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the front panel, as shown. WA RNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater . This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or per formance of batteries. D3-4-2-3-3_En 7 m DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 7 En 01 ⢠You can control this recorder using the remote sensor of another Pioneer component via the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connections on page 14 for more information. Disc/content format playback compatibility Compatible media ⢠DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 6x ⢠DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x ⢠DVD RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x ⢠DVD R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x ⢠DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x ⢠DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x ⢠DVD R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs. The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recordersâ limited compatibility with DVD- RW ver. 1.2 discs. *1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. *2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. *3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. Readable file system This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the following file systems 1 : ISO 9660*, UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01. * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. Model Playable Recordable DVR-7000 Yes *1,2,3 No DVR-310 DVR-510H Yes *1 No Note 1⢠Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly. ⢠MP3/WMA files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video files and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or ISO 9660 file systems. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types. Notes to table *1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 101). *2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 101). *3 Erasable, but free space does not increase. *4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing. *5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback. *6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units) (page 49). *7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback. *8 Must be compatible with DVD RW playback. *9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback. *10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (page 113). *11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM. *12 CPRM-compatible discs only. *13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited. *14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor increase the number of recordable titles left. *15 Must be compatible with DVD R playback. *16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be recorded (page 101). In this case, initialization will take about an hour. is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. HDD DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD- RAM Marks used in this manual *1 *1 *2 *13, 16 Logos Re-recordable/ Erasable î *3 *3 î î *3 î *14 î Editing of recorded programmes î î î *4 î î *4 î *4 î *4 î Recording of Copy- once protected material î î *12 î *12 î *12 Playback in other players/recorders n/a *5 î *6 *7 î *6 î *6, 15 î *8 î *9 Chase play î 16:9 and 4:3 programme recording î î î î Dual mono/ Bilingual broadcast recording of both audio channels î *10, 11 î *11 î *11 î *11 HDD DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 9 En 01 Using DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD R DL (Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable layers on a single side, giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a conventional single-layer disc. This unit can record to both DVD-R DL and DVD R DL discs. ⢠If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or DVD R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that some DVD recorders/players may not play even finalized DL discs.) ⢠This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc: Correct operation has been confirmed for DL discs: ⢠DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) ⢠DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) ThatâÂÂs JVC ⢠DVD R DL 2.4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) RICOH ⢠DVD R DL 2.4x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) RICOH About DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content âÂÂvideo, audio, etc. âÂÂwhile the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play. It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable. The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. Other disc compatibility In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an unplayable format â see below for further compatibility information. CD-R/-RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. ⢠Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/ Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. ⢠Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD- Audio and Video CD/Super VCD) ⢠Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only Compressed audio compatibility ⢠Compatible media: DVD-ROM, DVD-R/-RW, DVD R/ RW, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only : USB ⢠Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) Video CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW Super Video CD (Super VCD) DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En ⢠Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) ⢠Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes ⢠VBR WMA playback: No ⢠WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) ⢠DRM (Digital Rights Management) 1 file playback: No ⢠File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: Up to 99 folders/999 files (if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable) WMA (Windows Media⢠Audio) compatibility This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media Player for Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series. Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. DivX video compatibility DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX î video codec from DivX, Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitlesâÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. ⢠Official DivX î Certified product. ⢠Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files. ⢠File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder. ⢠File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. Note 1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 11 En 01 DivX î VOD content In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important ⢠DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. ⢠If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for this recorder, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play. ⢠Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the recorder on page 134) will not cause you to lose your registration code. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files * File format used by digital still cameras ⢠Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0 ⢠Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels ⢠Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels ⢠Progressive JPEG compatible: No ⢠File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files â do not use for other file types) ⢠File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Dolby Digital Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Outâ are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. DivX DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 12 En About the internal hard disk drive The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment. When used without the proper care or in the wrong conditions, it is possible that recorded contents may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making even normal playback or recording impossible. Please understand that in the event of repair or replacement of the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings will be lost. Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure. The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect against accidental loss. Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from HDD failure. ⢠Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface. ⢠Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan. ⢠Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure. ⢠Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below: 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the front panel display, wait at least two minutes. 2 Unplug from the wall socket. 3 Move the recorder. ⢠If thereâÂÂs a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost. ⢠The HDD is very delicate. If used over time in an improper manner or in an unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will be possible. In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit. Optimizing HDD performance As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the recorderâÂÂs performance. Before this happens, the recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD (which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on page 101). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 13 En 01 Symbols used in this manual The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc. HDD Any type of DVD disc (recordable or playback only), finalized or not. Commercially produced DVD, finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW. Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized) VR mode DVD-R/-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM Audio CD Video CD Super VCD WMA or MP3 files DivX files All of the above HDD DVD DVD-Video DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 DivX A L L DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 14 En Chapter 2 Connections Rear panel connections 1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV. 2 INPUT 3 Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for connection to a satellite receiver, set top box, etc. 3 OUTPUT 2 Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 4 HDMI OUT HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video. 5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder or other equipment with a digital input. 6 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for connection to a satellite receiver, set top box, etc. 7 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input. 8 OUTPUT 1 Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 9 CONTROL IN Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the Pioneer î mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini- plug cord. 10 AC IN â Power inlet Connect to a power outlet using the supplied power cable after making all other connections. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CO NTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 1 2 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 15 En 02 Front panel connections On the front panel there is a flip-down cover that hides more connections. Left side: 11 DV IN A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a DV camcorder. 12 USB port (Type B) (DVR-650H-S, DVR-550H-S only) USB port for connecting a PictBridge- compatible printer or PC. 13 USB port (Type A) (DVR-650H-S, DVR-550H-S only) USB port for connecting a digital camera, keyboard or other USB device. Right side: 14 INPUT 2 Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and S-video), especially suitable for camcorders, game consoles, portable audio, etc. USB DV IN 11 12 13 INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO 14 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 16 En Easy connections The setup described here is a basic configuration that allows you to record TV programmes on both this recorder and your VCR. When watching recordings from this recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to input 2 to watch a video playing in the VCR. Important ⢠This recorder is equipped with copy protection technology. Do not connect this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your VCR via this recorder) using AV cables, as the picture from this recorder will not appear properly on your TV. ⢠Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. 1 Connect your TV antenna/cable TV outlet to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on this recorder. 2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to connect the ANTENNA OUT jack on this recorder to the antenna input on your VCR. ⢠If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect this recorder directly to your TV and skip the next step. 3 Use an RF antenna cable to connect the antenna output on your VCR to the antenna input on your TV. 4 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of audio/ video inputs on your TV. Use the supplied three-pin audio/video cable. It is colour-coded to help you match them up (red/white for the right/left audio connections and yellow for video in/outs). Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. 5 Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V IN 2 above) using a set of audio and video cables. ⢠See the following page if you want to use S-video or component video cables for the video connection. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CONT ROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 TV Antenna/cable TV wall outlet VCR ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 2 OUTPUT 1 3 5 4 To antenna input To antenna input From antenna output To audio/video input To audio/ video input From audio/ video output DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 17 En 02 Using other types of video output This recorder has standard (composite), S-video and component video outputs. The main difference between them is the quality of the picture. S-video delivers a better picture than composite video, while component video gives better picture quality still. The variety of outputs also gives you the flexibility of connecting your particular equipment using the best connection type available. 1 Connecting using an S-video output S-video carries the picture as separate colour and luminance (brightness) signals. There are two S-video outputs for connection to TVs, monitors, VCRs or other equipment. ⢠Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect an S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to an S-video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). 2 Connecting using the component video output Component video carries the picture as two separate colour signals, plus a luminance (brightness) signal. See also Component Video Out on page 108 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scan- compatible TV. ⢠Use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV, monitor (or other equipment). TV AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CONT ROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 1 2 S-VIDEO OUTPUT To component video input To S-video input DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 18 En Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (1) If you are using a cable box or satellite receiver with only a few scrambled channels, follow the setup on this page 1 . If many or all the channels are scrambled, we recommend using the setup on the following page. Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record unscrambled channels by selecting them on this recorder. ⢠Record scrambled channels by selecting them on the cable box/satellite receiver and using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 48). ⢠Watch one channel while recording another. Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch the output from this recorder. 3 Connect the audio/video output of your cable box/satellite receiver to the INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note 1 The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CO NTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 TV Antenna/cable TV wall outlet Cable box/ Sat ellite receiver ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC 1 2 3 To antenna input To antenna input From antenna output To audio/video input From audio/ video output DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 19 En 02 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver (2) If many or all the channels you receive by cable or satellite are scrambled, we recommend using this setup. 1 Using the setup on this page you can: ⢠Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite receiver. ⢠Record using the Auto Start Recording feature (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 48). Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder âÂÂthroughâ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amp/receiver. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your TV using a set of A/V cables (as supplied). This enables you to watch discs. 3 Connect the audio/video output of your cable box/satellite receiver to the INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set of A/V cables. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Note 1 ⢠The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another. ⢠The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-video or component video connections if theyâÂÂre available. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT CONT ROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COMP ONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 TV Antenna/cable TV wall outlet Cable box/ Sat ellite receiver ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 INPUT 1/AUTO START REC 2 3 To antenna input To antenna input From antenna output To audio/video input From audio/ video output DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 20 En Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amp/ receiver using the digital coaxial output. In addition to the digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection. YouâÂÂll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amp/receiver. Use the standard (composite) video output (as shown here), or the S-video or component video connections. See also Audio Out on page 109 for how to set up the digital audio output. (Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amp/ receiver.) Important ⢠Do not connect this recorder to your TV âÂÂthroughâ your VCR or other component using A/V cables. Always connect it directly to your TV. 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. 2 Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to a set of audio/video inputs on your AV amp/receiver. 3 Use an coaxial digital audio cable (not supplied) to connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack on this recorder to an coaxial digital input on your AV amp/ receiver. This enables you to listen to multichannel surround sound. 1 4 Connect the AV amp/receiverâÂÂs video output to a video input on your TV. Note 1 If your AV amp/receiver doesnâÂÂt have an coaxial digital input, but has a optical type, converter boxes that convert from coaxial to optical are available at specialist audio dealers. AC IN DIGITAL AUD IO OUT COA XIAL HDMI OUT CO NTROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 COM PONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AU TO START REC INPUT 3 TV Antenna/cable TV wall outlet AV a mp/ receiver ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA OUT 1 1 OUTPUT 1 3 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 2 4 To antenna input To audio/video input T o digital input To video input From video output DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 21 En 02 Connecting using HDMI If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped 1 monitor or display 2 , you can connect it to this recorder using an HDMI cable (not supplied). The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio. 1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on an HDMI- compatible display. ⢠The arrow on the cable connector body should be face down for correct alignment with the connector on the recorder. When connected to an HDMI component or HDCP-compatible DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights. HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) on page 114 for more information. Note that the HDMI settings remain in effect until you change them, or connect a new HDMI component. Important ⢠An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP connection, however, does not support audio. Consult your local audio dealer for more information. ⢠The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/ 20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio bitstream. ⢠If your connected component is only compatible with Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is not output). ⢠If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma display, please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to the supplied manual for more on this). About HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. Note 1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. 2 The pixel resolution of this recorderâÂÂs HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced. AC IN DIGITAL AUDI O OUT COAX IAL HDMI OUT CONT ROL IN S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R ANTENNA IN OUT S-VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L R Y P B P R OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 C OMPONENT VIDEO OUT INPUT 1 / AUTO ST ART REC INPUT 3 HDMI OUT To HDMI input HDMI-compatible display DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 22 En HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround- sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigabits per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC. HDMI Control By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television or AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.) with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected plasma television, as well as have the connected plasma television automatically change inputs in response to this unit starting playback. Refer to the operating manual for your plasma television or AV system for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable. Auto-select function You can have a connected plasma television or AV system automatically change inputs when playback begins on this unit (including when you have a GUI (such as Disc Navigator) set to display on this unit). Certain connected plasma televisions may have their power turned from off to on when using this function. Simultaneous power function You can have this unit turn on automatically when the power for a connected plasma television is turned on. To have this unitâÂÂs power turned off when a connected plasma television is turned off, you must change the simultaneous power function of your plasma television. Unified language function By receiving language information from a connected plasma television, you can have this unitâÂÂs language settings automatically change to those of the plasma television (language information can be received only when no media is being played back and no recordings are taking place, or when you choose not to display this unitâÂÂs GUI displays). Refer to your plasma televisionâÂÂs operating manual for more information regarding how your plasma television transmits language information. Setup Navigator Language information is imported from your plasma television before you begin Setup Navigator (see Switching on and setting up on page 30). Important ⢠Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, change connection settings, turn this unitâÂÂs power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected component. If you experience any problems, turn the HDMI control for all connected units ON and check the video output from this unit. ⢠You cannot use the Auto Start Recording function (see Automatic recording from a satellite tuner on page 48) if you have this unitâÂÂs power set to turn on simultaneously with a plasma television. If you do not want this unit to turn on automatically when you turn the power to your plasma television, set this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control to OFF (page 115). ⢠When a scheduled recording finishes, this unitâÂÂs power is not turned off if the power for the plasma television is on. ⢠Even if you make Child Lock settings (see Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) on page 46), this unit can still be controlled by the remote of a connected plasma 02 Connecting _Up_EU.fm 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 23 En 02 television. If you do not want this unit to be able to be controlled by another component when you have set a Child Lock, turn this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control to OFF (page 115). ⢠We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI control-compatible components other than those made by Pioneer. Connecting other AV sources Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder 1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. 2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder. ⢠You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection. ⢠The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder input. ⢠When connecting an external AV source that only supports monaural sound, only insert the left (white) audio jack to this device. Doing so will allow the same sound track to be recorded to both channels. You must connect to the INPUT 2 jack on the front panel. Connecting a DV camcorder You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with DV output to the front panel DV IN jack. Important ⢠This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video decks. ⢠Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV IN jack of this recorder. Analog camcorder HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) R AU DIO REC VCR (Rear panel) AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT (Front panel) AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT 1 2 From audio/video output To audio/video input DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DV camcorder HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) R AUDI O REC From DV output DV IN DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 02 24 En Connecting a USB device (DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only) Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can connect USB devices such as digital cameras, printers, keyboards and PCs. Please also see the instructions that came with the device you want to connect before using. Important ⢠Some USB devices may not work with this recorder. ⢠When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the power is turned off on both the PC and this unit when you connect them via USB. ⢠We recommend connecting USB devices when this recorder is switched off (in standby). JPEG file storage devices ⢠Digital still camera ⢠Memory card reader (any type of memory card) ⢠USB memory The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it. The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to transfer up to maximum 4000 files. WMA/MP3 file storage devices ⢠Memory card reader (any type of memory card) ⢠USB memory ⢠PC (Use Connect PC function) The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it. Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used, the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To read another card, remove all the cards and insert the card to be read again. Using a USB hub ⢠Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/ or 2.0. ⢠Use an independently powered hub (bus powered hubs may not work reliably). ⢠In the event of unreliable operation with the hub, we recommend plugging the device directly into the recorderâÂÂs USB port. ⢠Operation may become unreliable if too many devices are connected to the hub. In this case, try unplugging some devices. ⢠If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for the devices connected, communication can become unreliable. In this case, disconnect one or more devices then perform a USB restart. (See Restart USB Device on page 116.) Using a USB printer ⢠Use a PictBridge-compatible printer. Using a USB keyboard ⢠Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2-USB adapter. Digital Camera HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) R AU DIO REC Keyboard USB (T ype B) PictBridge-compatible Printer USB USB USB (T ype A) PC DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Connections 25 En 02 Using a PC ⢠Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB to copy WMA and MP3 files. For more information, see Connect PC on page 88. To use Connect PC with this device, your PC must run either the Windows XP Home Edition (SP2) or Windows XP Professional (SP2) operating system and be able to run Windows Media Player 10. Even if your PC can run Windows Media Player 10, we cannot guarantee that it will function properly with this device. For more details see the âÂÂHelpâ section of Windows Media Player 10. Plugging in After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder. ⢠Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 26 En Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 DivX indicator Lights when this recorder plays DivX video files. 2 HDD/DVD Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and playback. 3 COPY indicator Lights when copying is underway. 4 Disc tray 5 HDD/DVD indicator Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected. 6 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 7 HDMI indicator Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI (HDCP) compatible component. 8 Front panel display and IR remote sensor See Display on page 27 for details. 9 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 10 Front panel inputs See Front panel connections on page 15 for more information on these. 11 î Press to start or restart playback. î Press to stop playback. î STOP REC Press to stop recording. ONE TOUCH COPY Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. CH /â Use to change channels, skip chapters/ tracks, etc. INPUT SELECT Press to change the input used for recording. REC MODE Press repeatedly to cycle through recording modes (picture quality). 12 î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in 30 minute blocks. HDD/DVD DivX COPY HDMI OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY REC MODE INPUT 2 VIDEO S-VIDEO L ( MONO ) R AU DI O REC 8 4 6 1 7 3 2 5 12 10 9 10 11 DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 27 En 03 Display 1 î Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused. 2 î Lights when copying. 3 î Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused. 4P M Lights to indicate PM (after midday) for the clock display. 5 (page 39) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but there isnâÂÂt a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.) NTSC Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC. (page 109) Taiwan and Philippines model: Indicates which channels are recorded when dual mono is selected. Other: Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. (page 108) Lights when the component video output is set to progressive scan (except in some cases when a component is connected using HDMI). SAP (page 36) ( Taiwan and Philippines model only ) Lights when the currently selected TV channel has a Secondary Audio Programme channel. 6 Recording quality indicators (page 37) XP Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best quality). SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). LP/SLP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play) or SLP (super long play). EP/SEP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play) or SEP (super extended play). MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode. 7 Character display 8 R/RW Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or DVD-RW. 9 AUTO Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and during Auto Start Recording. 10 PL (page 68) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 2 3 (page 116) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. P R L 8 9 7 2 3 5 6 1 10 PM 4 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 03 28 En Remote control 1 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 79) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 2 Remote control indicator Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a TV (page 130) and when setting the remote control mode (page 116). 3 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 4 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 5 HDD Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or playback. 6 DVD Press to select the DVD for recording or playback. 7 INPUT SELECT (page 47) Press to change the input to use for recording. 8 Alphanumeric buttons, and CLEAR Use the number buttons for track/chapter/ title selection; channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on. Use the button to enter non-alphanumeric characters and symbols. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. 9 CH /â (page 36) Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 10 G-Code⢠(page 41) Press then use the number buttons to enter a G-Code programming number for timer recording. G-Code is a trademark of Gemstar Development Corporation. The G-Code system is manufactured under license from Gemstar Development Corporation. 11 DVD playback functions AUDIO (page 36, 61) Changes the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) SUBTITLE (page 60) Displays/changes the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. ANGLE (page 62) Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes. 12 PLAY MODE (page 58) Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such as search, repeat and programme play). HDD/DVD RECORDER STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH COPY OPEN/CLOSE TOP MENU RETURN DISC NAVIGA TOR MENU HOME MENU CASE SELECTION INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT ABC AUDIO HDD DVD SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE HELP DISPLAY DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR ENTER CLEAR TV CONTROL CH CHANNEL VOLUME REC PREV PA USE STOP CM OK BACK SKIP REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN NEXT STEP/SLOW STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC î î î î î î G -CODE 1 2 4 12 9 14 17 3 5 13 15 16 20 21 22 11 6 7 18 19 8 10 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 29 En 03 13 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 56, 68) / TOP MENU (page 53) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded. 14 MENU (page 53) Press to display the disc menu if a DVD- Video disc is loaded. 15 îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î and ENTER Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. 16 HOME MENU Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 17 RETURN Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. 18 HELP Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen. 19 DISPLAY (page 62) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. 20 Playback controls (page 52) î REV SCAN î FWD SCAN (page 57) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. î PLAY Press to start playback. î PAUSE Press to pause playback or recording. î STOP Press to stop playback. CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the video playing. CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the video playing. î PREV î NEXT Press to skip to the previous or next title/ chapter/track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page. î î STEP/SLOW (page 57) During playback, press to start slow- motion playback; while paused, press to show the previous or next video frame. 21 Recording controls (page 38) î REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. î STOP REC Press to stop recording. REC MODE (page 37) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). TIMER REC (page 39) Press to start setting a timer recording. 22 TV CONTROL (page 130) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 30 En Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on and setting up When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output. If youâÂÂre using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder. Important ⢠Some of the Setup Navigator on-screen displays (OSDs) in this section vary slightly depending on the country or region of purchase. ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. 2 Switch on the recorder. When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup Navigator doesnâÂÂt appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 106). 3 Choose a language (then press ENTER). 4 Start the Setup Navigator. ⢠If you donâÂÂt want to use the Setup Navigator, press î to select Cancel , then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. 5 Select an option then press ENTER. Taiwan and Philippines model: Other: ⢠Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example). ⢠You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN . ⢠Select your country. î STANDBY/ON ENTER English Español Language Italiano Português ENTER k Setting t Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Start Cancel Start Complete this setup before you start using your recorder . Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Channel Setting English Cable Do not Set Antenna k Setting Line System e r Save P Auto Channel Setting English Do not Set Auto Scan ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save k Setting t Line System e r Save P Country Selection Country Singapore DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 31 En 04 ⢠Auto-tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets. 6 Select âÂÂAutoâ for automatic time setting, or âÂÂManualâ to set the clock manually. ⢠Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the programme. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set âÂÂClock Set CHâ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to âÂÂStartâ and press ENTER . The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that itâÂÂs set, select Next to proceed. If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select Manual . ⢠Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. Press î then use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOffâ for daylight saving/summer time, then press ENTER. Select On if you are currently using daylight saving/summer time. Set the date and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Taiwan and Philippines model: The date is in month/day/year format. Other: The date is in day/month/year format. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to move from one field to another. ⢠Press ENTER to finish setting the time. Tu n ing 32/68 Cancel ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P Clock Setting Auto Manual Auto k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date Time Clock Set CH âÂÂâ / âÂÂâ / âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ âÂÂâ : âÂÂâ AM 2 Start k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Auto Clock Setting Date T ime Clock Set CH 1 / 01 / 2007 MON 12 : 00 AM 2 Start Next k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone D.S.T Off Singapore Singapore 1/2 k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting T ime Zone D.S.T On Singapore Singapore 1/2 k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Manual Clock Setting Date T ime T ime Zone D.S.T On Singapore Singapore 1/ / 01 12 : 00 AM 2007 MON 2/2 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 04 32 En 7 Select the TV screen type, âÂÂWide (16:9)â or âÂÂStandard (4:3)âÂÂ. 8 Select whether or not your TV is compatible with progressive scan video. ⢠Note that progressive scan video is only output through the component video outputs and only when the video source is NTSC (see Using other types of video output on page 17). 9 Press to continue after reading the HDD caution. 10 Select âÂÂFinish Setupâ to exit the Setup Navigator, or âÂÂGo Backâ if you want to start again. That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. ⢠If there are blank channels with no station, you can set these to skip using the manual channel setting. See Manual CH Setting on page 107. ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator TV Screen Size Wide (16:9) Standard (4:3) ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator Progressive Compatible Not Compatible Don't Know Not Compatible ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save P p Navigator p Navigator In the event of HDD failure, recordings may be lost or normal playback/recording may not be possible. As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD failure, we recommend to use the HDD only as temporary storage media. Please copy recordings you want to keep to recordable DVD. Press ENTER to continue. ENTER k Setting Line System e r Save p Navigator p Navigator Setup is complete! Finish Setup Go Back Finish Setup DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 33 En 05 Chapter 5 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD- RW, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD R DL media. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends on what you want to do with the recording which mode you choose. If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way, VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying, and changing the way the video is presented. Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard DVD players (many of which wonâÂÂt play VR mode discs 1 ). Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all recording on that disc will be in that mode. DVD RW discs can be initialized for VR mode recording. DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording. DVD R discs do not require initializing. Important The table below shows the maximum number of titles recordable per disc and the maximum number of chapters per title: *1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc. *2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc. ⢠This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD R discs recorded on another recorder. DVD RW discs recorded on another recorder are playable on this recorder but are not recordable. ⢠The maximum continuous recording time for one title is eight hours when using a DVD R/ RW disc. ⢠If you delete a title from a DVD R/ RW disc, the total number of recordable titles remaining may not increase. ⢠Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you canâÂÂt mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117. Note 1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. Disc type/rec. format Max. titles (per disc) Max. chapters (per title) DVD-R/-RW Video mode 99 99 DVD-R/-RW/-RAM VR mode 99 999 *1 DVD R/ RW 49 99 *2 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 34 En ⢠If power to the recorder is cut (due to a power outage, the plug being pulled from the power outlet, etc.) during recording, editing, initializing, finalizing or other operation, some recorded material on the disc, or the disc itself, may become unusable. In this case, try re-initializing the disc (DVD-RW only), or use a new disc. Pioneer is not responsible for lost recordings, damaged discs or other losses in these cases. ⢠Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs. ⢠Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder. ⢠See also Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc compatibility information. Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs is generally the same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however, please note the following points: ⢠When the recorder switches from the first layer to the second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new title is automatically started on the new layer. ⢠Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when the layer is switched, recording will stop. ⢠Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD R DL disc. ⢠You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc that has been recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD recorder. About HDD recording Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality options, including manual mode, and of course you can record, erase and re-record as many times as you like. The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it, even using the higher quality recording modes. Important ⢠The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached. ⢠The maximum continuous recording time for one title is 12 hours. ⢠It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting (page 117) matches the TV line system of the source youâÂÂre recording. HDD Video mode compatibility When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see page 113). Taiwan and Philippines model: When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW is possible. When recording a broadcast with a Secondary Audio Programme (SAP) channel, set which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup menu (see Dual Mono Recording on page 109). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 35 En 05 When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW isnâÂÂt possible. However, when SAP is selected as the broadcast audio channel, both the main and SAP channels are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback. Other: When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW is possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 109). When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW isnâÂÂt possible. However, both channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback. Recorded audio In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible) . When set to LPCM , sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. Taiwan and Philippines model: If the broadcast audio has a SAP channel and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/ -RW, DVD R/ RW, or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting, use the AUDIO button to select the Mono , Stereo or SAP audio channel to record before recording starts. In other cases, if SAP is selected then both the main and SAP audio channels will be recorded and you can switch on playback. The table below shows the different audio output possibilities: Other: If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/-RW, DVD R/ RW, or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 109) to select the A/ L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on playback. Restrictions on video recording You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen. Video that is âÂÂcopy-once onlyâ can only be recorded to DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM- compatible VR mode DVD-R/-RW (see below). When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 62). Audio setting Audio output Left (L) Right (R) MONO L R L R STEREO LR SAP L R SAP DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 36 En CPRM CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed for the recording of âÂÂcopy onceâ broadcast programmes. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media . This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM- compatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Using the built-in TV tuner There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note that you canâÂÂt change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby. ⢠CH /â buttons ⢠Number buttons For example, to select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER ; for channel 34, press 3 , 4 , ENTER . 1 ⢠CH /â buttons on the front panel Changing audio channels Taiwan and Philippines model: Some TV programmes are broadcast with both a main and a Secondary Audio Programme (SAP). You can change the TV audio using the AUDIO button. ⢠Press to change the audio type. The current audio channel is displayed on- screen. ⢠If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP channel being broadcast, you will still hear the main audio channel. ⢠If the sound is poor quality when set to Stereo , you can often improve it by changing to Mono . Note 1⢠Taiwan and Philippines model: Antenna channels are numbered 2 through 69. Cable channels are numbered 1 through 125. ⢠Other: Channel presets are numbered 1 through 99. CH ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR AUDIO Mono SAP St ereo DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 37 En 05 Note ⢠When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a dual mono broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Dual Mono Recording setting (see Dual Mono Recording on page 109). Other: You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal. ⢠Press to change the audio type. The current audio channel is displayed on- screen. ⢠If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 108) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. ⢠If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language. ⢠You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast. ⢠When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 108), you can switch the audio channel between left ( L ), right ( R ) or both ( L R ). Note ⢠When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 109). Setting the picture quality/ recording time Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual Recording on page 112), a further option will be available ( MN1 to MN32 , LPCM , or XP (a super-high quality HDD recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15 Mbps) depending on what you set). When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording quality available. If you select XP , the recording mode will automatically revert to MN32 . When recording to DVD R/ RW, SLP is the longest recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to MN3 , the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP . ⢠Press repeatedly to select the recording quality. ⢠XP â High quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠SP (Standard Play) â Default quality, used for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD. AUDIO NICAM Regular NICAM A NICAM B Regular NICAM A B A (L) B (R) A B (L R) LR L R DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD REC MODE DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 38 En ⢠LP (Long Play) â Lower video quality than SP, but doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four hours. ⢠EP (Extended Play) â Lower quality than LP, but gives about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠SLP (Super Long Play) â Lower quality than EP, but gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠SEP (Super Extended Play) â Lowest video quality but gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD disc. ⢠MN1 to MN32 / LPCM 1 / XP 2 â Manual/ Linear PCM/XP (available only when manual recording is on). The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 115) is Off then this information is not displayed.) Basic recording from the TV Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the channel to record, choosing whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality. 1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. ⢠If youâÂÂre recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc). ⢠If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 50). 2 Select a TV channel to record. The front panel display shows the channel number: ⢠While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel (e.g., for channel 24, press 2 , 4 then ENTER ). ⢠If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the CH /â buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. 3 Set the picture quality/recording time. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 37 for detailed instructions. 4 Select the audio channel to record. See Changing audio channels on page 36 for more on this. Taiwan and Philippines model: ⢠When recording in VR mode (DVD) or with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (HDD), both mono and SAP audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. Note 1⢠Taiwan and Philippines model: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a broadcast with a SAP channel, select which audio channel to record (see Dual Mono Recording on page 109). ⢠Other: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 109). 2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP recordings are always copied in real time. DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD HDD DVD CH Channel number ch REC MODE AUDIO DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 39 En 05 Other: ⢠When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. 5 Start recording. If you want to set a recording end time, press the î REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. ⢠To cancel the set recording time, press î REC . ⢠If you want to pause recording at any time 1 , press î PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording (If recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts). 6 Press to stop recording. ⢠If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing î STOP REC . ⢠Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/ DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). Setting a timer recording Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programmes can be set to record just once, every day, or every week. There are three ways to set a timer recording; using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see Easy Timer Recording on page 40), using the G-Code programming system (see Timer recording using the G-Code⢠programming system on page 41), or using manual timer recording (see Setting a manual timer recording on page 43). You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD). You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you donâÂÂt need to keep, you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recording made on that timer programme will be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 112 for more on this). Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isnâÂÂt a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording, the Recovery Recording feature will automatically record the programme to the HDD for you. Note 1 Except during Chase Play. REC î STOP RE C DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 40 En Important â¢A timer recording canâÂÂt be set if there are already 32 timer programmes waiting to be recorded. ⢠Timer recording will not start if: â The recorder is already recording. â A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. ⢠Timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished. ⢠When the front panel display is set to ON, the timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable). ⢠Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions. ⢠The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title (HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12 hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles. ⢠When a scheduled recording finishes, this unitâÂÂs power is not turned off if the power for the plasma television is on. If you want this unitâÂÂs power to turn off after a timer recording finishes, set the HDMI Contro l to Off (page 115). Easy Timer Recording As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes setting up a timer recording as simple as possible. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. 1 Select âÂÂTimer RecordingâÂÂ, then âÂÂEasy Timerâ from the Home Menu . 2 Set the TV channel to record. 3 Set the recording quality. ⢠DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality for the space available on the disc loaded at the time of recording. ⢠HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank DVD disc. 4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 5 Move the cursor to the recording start date and time on the grid. ⢠You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at a time using the î REV SCAN and î FWD SCAN buttons. HOME MENU PREV NEXT AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 9:30 SP REC MODE 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 AM â âÂÂâÂÂ:âÂÂâ 1/01 1/02 1/03 HDD HDD/DVD îÂÂî REC MODE HDD DVD AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 11:45 SP REC MODE 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 AM â âÂÂâÂÂ:âÂÂâ 1/01 1/02 1/03 îÂÂî Current time Recording start time HDD HDD/DVD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 41 En 05 Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is a 15 minute interval. The darker area represents time that has already passed and canâÂÂt therefore be selected. The lighter area is time thatâÂÂs available. 6 Set the start time. The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the screen. ⢠You can go back and reset the start time if you need to by pressing RETURN . 7 Move the cursor to the recording end time on the grid. As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow stretches from the start time to the current cursor position, representing the length of the recording. A recording of up to six hours can be set. 8 Set the end time. 9 Select âÂÂYesâ to set the timer recording and exit, or âÂÂNoâ to go back to the Easy Timer Recording screen. ⢠You can check the timer recording details you just set from the main timer recording screen (see Setting a manual timer recording on page 43). Timer recording using the G-Code ⢠programming system This system makes programming timer recordings very simple. Most TV guides publish G-Code programming numbers with their programme details. If you want to make a timer recording of a programme, you just input the corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell the recorder the recording mode, and whether itâÂÂs a once-only recording or a regular recording. Note that if the country setting is incorrect (set in the Setup Navigator), timer recordings made using the G-Code programming system may not work as expected. 1 Press âÂÂG-Codeâ to display the G-Code programme screen. You can also access this screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then G-Code system ). ⢠Use the number buttons to enter the G-Code programming number. (To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR .) ⢠You can also use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î buttons to select digits from the on- screen display. 2 After making the settings, select âÂÂEnterâ and press ENTER . The timer recording screen appears with the timer programme you just set. ENTER AM PM Easy Timer Recording 7ch 1/01 MON 11:45 SP REC MODE 11:00 12:00 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00 5:00 AM â 1:45 PM 1/01 1/02 1/03 îÂÂî Recording start time Recording end time HDD HDD/DVD ENTER G-Code# 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Clear Enter Details Cancel 2 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 42 En 3 Confirm that the settings are correct. If the channel number isnâÂÂt displayed, use the îÂÂ/î buttons to highlight CH , then use the îÂÂ/î buttons to set the correct channel number. ⢠If the channel number is set, but incorrectly, set up the guide channel (see G-Code CH Setting on page 107). 4 Select âÂÂStore Programmeâ to finish. ⢠Other options in the same menu panel allow you to name the programme, and change the recording destination and/or recording mode. Checking/editing timer recording settings You can check and/or edit the timer recording settings made by the G-Code system by selecting Details from the G-Code# setting screen. 1 Select âÂÂDetailsâ from the G-Code# setting screen. The Timer Programme Set screen appears, filled out with the timer recording details. 2 Check and edit the fields as necessary. See Setting a manual timer recording on page 43 for more on this. 3 Select âÂÂStore Programmeâ to save the timer programme and exit. G-Code programming with the power off You can enter a G-Code programming number when the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc, youâÂÂll need to switch on the power and use the full G-Code programme screen. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature until you have set up the guide channels. see G-Code CH Setting on page 107. ⢠You canâÂÂt change the recording mode. ⢠You canâÂÂt program daily or weekly timer recordings. 1 Press âÂÂG-CodeâÂÂ. The front panel display shows the current recording mode and prompts you to enter the G-Code programming number. 2 Use the number buttons to enter the number. ⢠To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR . 3 Press ENTER. The display shows the timer settings: Date î Start time î End time î HDD and Recording channel î Recording mode ⢠If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that the number is correct and that the guide channel is set (see G-Code CH Setting on page 107), then set the timer recording again. ⢠If CANâÂÂT SET appears in the display, it means that although you entered a valid number, the programme has already finished. ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 43 En 05 Setting a manual timer recording The timer recording screen you can see all the timer programmes already set, clear programmes and set up new ones. 1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording screen. You can also access the Timer Recording screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording ). This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set. ⢠Each row is for one timer recording programme, with the date and time information, channel, recording mode, DVD or HDD and recording status. ⢠The amount of free space available on the HDD and the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen. ⢠In the upper-right corner, the number of timer programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms . ⢠If there are more than five timer programmes already set, press NEXT î to switch page (go back using the PREV î button). ⢠You can also delete a timer programme before itâÂÂs started (before the recorder enters timer recording standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR . See also Deleting a timer programme on page 45. 2 Select âÂÂNew Inputâ to set a new timer programme, then press ENTER. 3 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select a field; use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the value. ⢠CH â Choose a channel (2 to 69 for antenna channels; 1 to 125 for cable/Pr1 to Pr 99, excluding skip channels), or one of the external inputs from which to record. ⢠Date â Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly programme. ⢠Start â Set the recording start time. ⢠Stop â Set the recording end time (maximum length of a timer recording is 24 hours). ⢠Extend â Extend the end time of the timer recording (select Off , 30 , 60 , 90 or 120 mins). 4 If you want to change the recording mode, recording destination, etc., select âÂÂSet DetailedâÂÂ. In this area you can set: Record to â Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD for DVD recording. Select HDD for Auto Replace Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only). Recording Mode â Select XP , SP , LP, EP, SLP or SEP , (See Setting the picture quality/ recording time on page 37). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the LPCM setting, XP or MN (press ENTER then use the îÂÂ/î buttons to select the level). HDD Remain DVD Remain 59h59m(SP) 1h59m(SP) 3/26 SUN 3:00PM Tmr Pgms 3/32 Manhattan Open T ennis OK 3/26 SUN 6:00PM â 7:00PM 10ch W orld Journey OK 3/27 MON 7:30PM â 9:00PM 4ch 8ch Flower Until 4/20 MON â FRI 1:30PM â 2:00PM New Input T imer Programme View T imer Programme Set Manhattan Open T ennis CH Date Start Stop Extend 10ch EVERYDA Y 6:00PM 7:00PM 30 min Enter Details Detailed Settings Record T o HDD Recording Mode XP Auto Replace Rec. On Genre No Category Dual Mono Recording L HDD Recording Format Video Mode On Store Programme Cancel Set Title Name Set Detailed DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 44 En Auto Replace Rec. â Automatically erases the previous daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded. Genre â Select a record genre (for HDD recording only). Dual Mono/Bilingual Recording â Select which channel of a dual mono/bilingual broadcast to record (necessary if recording to a Video mode DVD or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On ). HDD Recording Format â Select Video Mode On or Video Mode Off depending on whether you need high-speed copying to Video mode DVD capability or not. 5 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight âÂÂStore Programmeâ and press ENTER . The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The timer programme you just input appears in the list. The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages: ⢠OK â Can be recorded. ⢠Time Over â Not enough space on the HDD (the recording wonâÂÂt finish). ⢠Over 12h â Recording time of over 12 hours set (when recording to the HDD the recording will be split into two titles). ⢠Overlap â Two timer programmes partially or completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take priority. ⢠Until ... (eg., Until 8/13 ) â For a regular recording, the last programme that could be recorded is shown. ⢠Data Over âÂÂCanâÂÂt record because the disc management area of the disc is full. ⢠Cancel Once â A regular timer programme is set to skip. ⢠CanâÂÂt Rec â Not possible to record. ⢠Title Over â CanâÂÂt record because there is already the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99). ⢠Recording â The programme is currently recording. ⢠Standby â The recorder is in timer recording standby. ⢠nothing displayed â Another timer recording or copying is in progress. 6 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME MENU. Tip ⢠To enter a title name for the timer recording in advance, select Set Title Name and follow the on-screen display. Note ⢠If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded doesnâÂÂt have enough free space for the complete recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unless you load a suitable disc before the recording actually starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording. (The message CanâÂÂt Rec will appear if there are already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough free space on the HDD for recording.) ⢠For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 112) is set to On , the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 ( MN4 for DVD R/ RW) recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. ⢠If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. ⢠If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 45 En 05 Editing a timer programme You can change any of the settings in a timer programme before the recording is due to start. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to change . . . . 3 Press î then select âÂÂModifyâ from the command menu panel. Alternatively, press ENTER . The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which you can edit the settings. 4 Edit the timer recording settings as necessary. 5 Select âÂÂStore Programmeâ to finish. Confirm the settings you made from the following screen. Deleting a timer programme You can delete timer programmes you no longer need. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to erase . . . . 3 Press î then select âÂÂEraseâ from the command menu panel. ⢠Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel. ⢠You can also just press CLEAR when the timer programme is highlighted. Skipping a regular timer programme If youâÂÂve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme, you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled recording. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to skip . . . . 3 Press î then select âÂÂCancel Onceâ from the command menu panel. ⢠In the timer programme list, Cancel Once appears by the programme. ⢠You can also just press î PAUSE when the timer programme is highlighted. Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time in two different ways. This can be useful if a broadcast programme overruns, for example. Cancelling or extending the timer 1 Press and hold for three seconds during a timer recording. Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears from the front panel display indicating that the timer has been cancelled. 2 Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute blocks. Programming a new end time You can edit the end time of a timer recording you have previously set. 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer recording you want to change. 3 Press î then select âÂÂModifyâ from the command menu panel. Alternatively, press ENTER . The Timer Programme Set screen appears, from which you can edit the settings. 4 Edit the end time as necessary. You can also edit the Extend time parameter. REC î REC î ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 46 En 5 Select âÂÂStore ProgrammeâÂÂ. 6 Press to exit the Timer Recording screen. Stopping a timer recording 1 Press during a timer recording. 2 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm. Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished. 1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. 2 [Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED . If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCKED is briefly displayed again. ⢠To unlock the recorder, press and hold î (Stop) on the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED . ⢠Even if you make Child Lock settings, this unit can still be controlled by the remote of a connected plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be able to be controlled by another component when you have set a Child Lock, turn this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control to OFF (page 115). Timer recording FAQ Frequently Asked Questions ⢠Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesnâÂÂt start recording! Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 100), and that there are fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD. ⢠The recorder wonâÂÂt let me enter a timer programme! Why not? You canâÂÂt enter a timer programme if the clock isnâÂÂt set. ⢠What happens when two or more timer programmes overlap? Basically, the programme with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the programme with the later start time after the earlier programme is finished. If schedule to record two programmes have the same times (but different channels, for example), then only one of the two programmes will be recorded. In this event you should cancel the scheduled recording of the lesser important programme. If one of the overlapping programmes is a regular timer programme, you may choose âÂÂCancel Onceâ in order to avoid having it overlap with a separately scheduled programme (see Skipping a regular timer programme on page 45 ) . ENTER HOME MENU STOP RE C ENTER î STANDBY/ON DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 47 En 05 Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in progress from the start, without having to wait until the recording has finished (i.e., playback is âÂÂchasingâ the recording). In fact, youâÂÂre not just limited to watching the recording in progress. You can watch anything else already on the HDD (or on a DVD if youâÂÂre recording to the HDD) by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 56). Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input (DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only). Important ⢠You canâÂÂt use this feature during Auto Start Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display). ⢠Press during recording to start playback from the beginning of the current recording 1 . ⢠Press during recording to select another title to play. You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. ⢠To stop playback, press î STOP (recording will continue). ⢠To stop recording, press î STOP REC (playback will continue). ⢠During recording or in timer recording standby, you canâÂÂt play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting doesnâÂÂt match the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117). Also, during simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop. Recording from an external component You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorderâÂÂs external inputs. 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 ( Connecting up ) for connection options. 2 Press repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. There are three analog inputs. The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display: ⢠L1 â INPUT 1/AUTO START REC ⢠L2 â INPUT 2 (front panel) ⢠L3 â INPUT 3 Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio , and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 108). ⢠If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording. Note 1 You canâÂÂt start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesnâÂÂt work while copying or backing up. HDD PLAY DISC NAVIGA TOR DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD INPUT SELECT DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 48 En ⢠To watch video coming in via the DV input (front panel), select DV > DV Video Playback from the Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on page 64). 3 Set the recording quality. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 37 for detailed information. 4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. 5 Press to start recording. ⢠If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 35 for more details. Automatic recording from a satellite tuner If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top box connected to the INPUT 1/AUTO START REC input, you can have the recorder start and stop recording automatically with the timer settings of the connected component. (If the other component doesnâÂÂt have a built-in timer, youâÂÂll need to use it with an external timer unit.) 1 After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder starts recording when it detects a signal from the other component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops recording. Important ⢠It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear this in mind when setting the timer. ⢠If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if another timer recording is in progress. ⢠Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer recording is due to start. After the timer recording has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume. ⢠Turn the HDMI Control setting to Off when using Auto Start Recording (page 115). 1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other component), then switch it into standby (if necessary). Check the manual that came with the receiver if youâÂÂre not sure how to do this. 2 Check that the âÂÂAudio Inâ settings for âÂÂExternal Audioâ and âÂÂDual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recordingâ are as you want them. See Audio In on page 108 for more on these settings. 3 Set up the recorder. ⢠Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See Setting the picture quality/ recording time on page 37 for detailed information. 4 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂTimer RecordingâÂÂ, then âÂÂAuto Start RecordingâÂÂ. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or âÂÂNoâ to switch off. If you choose âÂÂYesâ the recorder automatically goes into standby. The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights. The recorder will automatically switch on and start recording when the other component comes on. Recording stops when the external component switches off. Note 1 You canâÂÂt set Auto Start Recording when: â the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby. â the HDD is not recordable. â the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (999). REC MODE HDD DVD REC î HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 49 En 05 ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording, press î STANDBY/ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO indicator goes off. ⢠To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has already started, press î REC for three seconds (this cancels Auto Start Recording, but recording continues), then î STOP REC to stop recording. ⢠You can also stop recording by pressing î STOP REC then selecting Yes to confirm. Tip ⢠Alternatively, with no OSD displayed, press and hold the front panel î STOP REC button for more than three seconds to switch Auto Start Recording on directly. After switching on, switch the recorder into standby. When using the Video Control function of an external component, set the HDMI Control to Off (page 115). Playing your recordings on other DVD players Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD R discs. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD- ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to (finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc. All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/ î followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. Finalizing a disc Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings on the disc so that it can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. 1 Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it canâÂÂt be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 100 before starting the steps below. DVD RW discs donâÂÂt generally need finalizing. However, if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc, then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD RW, you can still record and edit even after finalizing. although the title menu will disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu. Important ⢠Once youâÂÂve finalized a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R disc, you canâÂÂt edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe âÂÂundoneâÂÂ; see Undo Finalize on page 101 for how to do this. DVD ( VR) DVD ( V ideo) DVD R DVD RW Note 1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117 for how to change the recorderâÂÂs setting. DVD ( VR) DVD ( V ideo) DVD R DVD RW DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 05 50 En â¢A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing. ⢠DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and DVD R DL discs must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/players. Note however that some recorders/ players will not play even finalized dual- layer discs. 1 Load the disc you want to finalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. 2 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂFinalizeâ > âÂÂFinalizeâ > âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 4 For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD R/ RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select âÂÂYesâ to start finalization or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the âÂÂtop menuâ (or âÂÂmenuâ for a DVD R/ RW) is selected on any DVD player. ⢠Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. During finalization: ⢠If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD R/ RW disc is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears. ⢠You canâÂÂt cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R disc. ⢠How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) and DVD R/ RW discs can take up to 20 minutes. Initializing recordable DVD discs DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording. 1 When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 51 if you want to change the default to Video mode. DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must initialize it before recording anything on the disc. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Finalize Undo Finalize Next Screen Start Finalize ENTER Finalize Note 1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. DVD-R DVD-RW DVD RW DVD-RAM DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Recording 51 En 05 DVD RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in order to erase the contents of the disc. Important ⢠Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD RW or DVD-RAM disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! ⢠You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder. ⢠Once initialized for VR mode recording, you canâÂÂt re-initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂInitializeâ > âÂÂVideo ModeâÂÂ, âÂÂVR Modeâ or âÂÂInitialize DVD RWâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour). DVD-RW Auto Initialize ⢠Default setting: VR Mode Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂBasicâÂÂ>âÂÂDVD-RW Auto Init.âÂÂ, then âÂÂVR Modeâ or âÂÂVideo ModeâÂÂ. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup VR Mode Video Mode Initialize DVD RW Start Start Start Initialize ENTER Initializing Disc 1 min left 2ch DVD-RW HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Basic VR Mode Video Mode Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 52 En Chapter 6 Playback Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor buttons and ENTER . To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. ⢠Many functions are not available when a Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 57). ⢠For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on page 92. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. Basic playback This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD. Important ⢠Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means any kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. ⢠Some DVD-Video, DVD R and DVD RW discs donâÂÂt allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. 1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below. Select DVD for any kind of disc playback. 2 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double-sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). ⢠If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 54. 3 Start playback. ⢠If youâÂÂre playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. ⢠When playing video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached. ⢠There may be a slight pause when playback switches from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc. ⢠See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. 4 Press to stop playback. 5 When youâÂÂve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. A L L HDD DVD OPEN/CLOSE î PLAY STOP DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 53 En 06 Playing DVD discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. Playing from the HDD The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD). P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) DVD R/DVD RW only: î PREV may not always skip to the previous title. Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the number buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER . All: P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER CM BACK SKIP P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. P ress to display the menu of a DVD- Video disc. (DVD R/ RW discs ï¬Ânalized on this recorder will display the Disc Navigator . P ress MENU to display the disc menu.) Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD- Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items. P ress to return to the previous level of a DVD- Video disc menu. P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached. P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. STEP/SLOW î î TO P MENU DISC NAVIGA TOR MENU ENTER RETURN PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 54 En Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs 1 , and WMA/MP3 files. Playing Video CD/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs. Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch. 2 P ress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. Note 1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 61). P ress to start playback. P ress to stop playback. P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER CM BACK SKIP STEP/SLOW î î PLAY STOP PA USE Except WMA: P ress to start scanning. P ress again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) P ress to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. P ress to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. P ress to stop playback. Video CD only: Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. 2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 57). REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER PLAY STOP PA USE DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 55 En 06 Playing DivX video files The table below shows the basic playback controls for DivX video files. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next track. When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. P ress CLEAR to clear a number entr y and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. Note that this function doesnâÂÂt work when playing in PBC mode. P ress to start slow-motion playback. P ress repeatedly to change the playback speed (forward only). While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward only). P ress to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR ENTER CM BACK SKIP STEP/SLOW î î RETURN P ress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on- screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback of titles (DivX ï¬Âles) proceeds in alphabetical order . P ress to stop playback. Y ou can resume playback from the same point by pressing î PLAY . (P ress î STOP again to cancel the resume function.) P auses playback, or restarts playback when paused. P ress to start scanning. P ress repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. P ress to skip to previous/next title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH /â buttons.) P ress to start slow motion playback (press repeatedly to change the slow motion play speed). While paused, press to advance one frame. P ress to display the playback audio type; press repeatedly to change the playback audio type. P ress to display subtitle information; press repeatedly to change subtitles. PLAY STOP PA USE REV SCAN FWD SCAN PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW î î AUDIO SUBTITLE DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 56 En Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback. Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view information on titles. See also Editing on page 67 for more on editing recordable discs. 1 Select the HDD or DVD. 2 Open the Disc Navigator. ⢠You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu. 3 Browse the list of titles. ⢠Use the î PREV /î NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page of titles. ⢠To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 72. ⢠For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a thumbnail title digest. If it doesnâÂÂt display, set Set Preview to Normal . See Set Preview on page 116. 4 Play the highlighted title. ⢠You can also select Play from the command menu options. Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the same time. 1 Display the View Options panel. 2 Choose âÂÂStyleâÂÂ, âÂÂSort orderâ or âÂÂGenreâÂÂ, then press ENTER to see the available view options. ⢠Style â Select four or eight titles per screen view ⢠Sort order â Sort by date (most recent first), unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest first) ⢠Genre â Display all genres or just a selected genre 3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. The title list display is updated according to the new display preferences. DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD HDD DVD DISC NAVIGA TOR Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7: 00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain HDD SP Recent first All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m MENU 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 9 8 7 10 ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 3 7 4 Titles Remain NEW first All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m HDD SP MENU 1 4 Titles Sort order Recent first Genre All Genres Style The Vie w Options panel 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 57 En 06 Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs 1 Display the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂDisc NavigatorâÂÂ. Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR , which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 3 Select what you want to play. Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all navigated in the same way. The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc. Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder that you want to play. Playback starts after you press ENTER . ⢠For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the playback area between CD , WMA/MP3 and DivX . This can only be done while the disc is stopped. Scanning discs (except WMA) You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backwards. 1 1 During playback, start reverse or forward scanning. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. 2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning speed. There are four scanning speeds available when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also possible with HDD and DVD video. 2 There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc. 3 Resume normal playback. Playing in slow motion You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles can only be played forwards in slow motion. There is no sound when playing in slow motion. 1 Press to start slow motion reverse or forward play. 2 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. The current playback speed is indicated on- screen. 3 Resume normal playback. DVD-Video CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 DivX HOME MENU ENTER ENTER CD WMA/MP3 Divx Folder (01-03) 01.Rock 02.Pop 03.Dance Tr ack(001-004) 001.Intro 002.Escape 003.Everything You Say 004.What I Do Disc Navigator Note 1⢠No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles. ⢠No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1 . ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. 2 Reverse playback may not be smooth. A L L REV SCAN FWD SCAN REV SCAN FWD SCAN PLAY DVD HDD Video CD S uper VCD DivX STEP/SLOW î î STEP/SLOW î î PLAY DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 58 En Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc 1 or the HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only use frame advance. 1 Pause playback. 2 Back up or advance one frame with each press. 3 Resume normal playback. The Play Mode menu The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and programme play functions. ⢠Press to display the Play Mode menu. ⢠You can also access the Play Mode menu from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU ). ⢠To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . Search Mode The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time 2 or by title/chapter/folder/track number. 1 Select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the Play Mode menu, then choose a search option. The available search options depend on the type of disc. 2 Enter a title/chapter/folder/ track number or a search time. Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2 , 5 , 0 , 0 . For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1 , 1 , 5 , 2 , 0 . Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current track, press 2 , 3 , 0 . Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6 . 3 Start playback. Note 1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. DVD HDD Video CD S uper VCD DivX PA USE STEP/SLOW î î PLAY A L L PLAY MODE Ti me Search Ti tle Search Chapter Search Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme 2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. A L L ENTER ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ CLEAR CLEAR Ti me Search Ti tle Search Chapter Search Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Input Time 0.01.00 ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 59 En 06 A-B Repeat The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over. 1 1 During playback, select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the Play Mode menu. 2 With âÂÂA (Loop Start)â highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to start. 3 With âÂÂB (Loop End)â highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round. ⢠When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD R/ RW, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. ⢠To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if youâÂÂre using the HDD for playback. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with programme play to repeat the tracks/ chapters in the programme list (see Programme play below). 2 ⢠Select âÂÂRepeatâ from the Play Mode menu, then choose a repeat play mode. ⢠To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Programme play This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters 3 /folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD. 1 Select âÂÂProgrammeâ from the Play Mode menu, then âÂÂInput/Edit ProgrammeâÂÂ. Note 1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled. DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX ENTER ENTER Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off ENTER 2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled. 3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. A L L ENTER Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Repeat Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Off HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 60 En The Input/Edit Programme screen varies according to the disc type. Below is the DVD input screen. 2 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the programme list. After pressing ENTER to add the title/ chapter/folder/track, the step number automatically moves down one. ⢠To insert a step into the programme list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER , all the subsequent steps move down one. ⢠To delete a step from the programme list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR . 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list. A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/ chapters/folders/tracks. 4 Play the programme list. Programme play remains active until you cancel programme play, erase the programme list, eject the disc or switch off the recorder. Tip ⢠To save your programme list and exit the programme edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE . ⢠During programme play, press î NEXT to skip to the next programme step. ⢠To repeat play the programme list, select Programme Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 59). ⢠Press CLEAR during playback to switch off programme play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the programme list. ⢠From the Programme menu you can also: Start Programme Play â Starts playback of a saved programme list Cancel Programme Play â Turns off programme play, but does not erase the programme list Erase Programme List â Erases the programme list and turns off programme play Displaying and switching subtitles Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback. 1 Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options. ⢠Select/change the subtitle language. The current subtitle language is shown on- screen and in the front panel display. ⢠To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR . Programme Step 01.001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Ti tle (01-03) Ti tle 01 Ti tle 02 Ti tle 03 Chapter(001-015) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Chapter 005 Chapter 006 Chapter 007 Chapter 008 ENTER PLAY Note 1⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 111. DVD-Video DivX SUBTITLE DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 61 En 06 Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback. 1 Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options. ⢠Change the audio soundtrack. The current audio language is shown on- screen and in the front panel display. ⢠The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. ⢠Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver on page 20 for connection details. Switching audio channels Taiwan and Philippines model: For HDD 2 and VR mode content that has both a main and a SAP (Secondary Audio Programme) audio channel, you can switch between main ( L ), SAP ( R ), or both ( L R ). 3 Other: For HDD 2 and VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left ( L ) channel, right ( R ) channel, or both ( L R ). 3 When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. ⢠Press repeatedly to display/ switch the audio channel. The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-screen. Taiwan and Philippines model: L R â Both channels (default) L â Left/main channel only R â Right/SAP channel only Other: L R â Both channels (default) L â Left channel only R â Right channel only Stereo â Stereo (default) 1/L â Left channel only 2/R â Right channel only 1 Stereo â Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default) 1 L â Soundtrack 1 / Left channel 1 R â Soundtrack 1 / Right channel 2 Stereo â Soundtrack 2 / Stereo 2 L â Soundtrack 2 / Left channel 2 R â Soundtrack 2 / Right channel Note 1⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 110. 2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off ( HDD Recording Format on page 113). 3 When playing a dual mono recording/bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital î PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 109) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. DVD-Video DivX AUDIO DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD S uper VCD WMA/MP3 AUDIO HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM CD V ideo CD WMA/MP3 S uper VCD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 06 62 En Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles â check the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you prefer â see Angle Indicator on page 114). ⢠Switch the camera angle. ⢠The angle number is displayed on- screen. ⢠If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. Displaying disc information on-screen You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded or the HDD. ⢠Display/change the on-screen information. ⢠Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc). ⢠To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears. HDD and removable disc activity display Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD button to switch between the two kinds of display. The example displays below show high- speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback. DVD-Video ANGLE DISPLAY Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Stop Remain â h â â m Stop Hi-Speed Copy HDD î DVD 0h08m left DVD-RW Video Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Chase Play Rec Remain 0h52m Stop DVD-RW Video Relative pla yback position Recording time Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name : Comedy shows Finalized Resume XP (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once St ereo WNBC Sh ow s recording restrictions for the current channel programme î Play DVD-R Video Title Name 11/21 Soccer game : C hapter T otal îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî C hapter Time 3âÂÂ2 0. 00. 15 ! 0. 00. 21 0h01m52s 4.32Mbps Indicates copy-protected material Indicates a multi-angle scene Indicates the data transfer ra te DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playback 63 En 06 Tip ⢠See Switching camera angles on page 62 for more on multi-angle scene switching. ⢠When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only. ⢠During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed. ⢠The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. ⢠The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the displayed record setting. ⢠Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD. ⢠The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused. ⢠Copy Once or CanâÂÂt Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV programme contains copy control information. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 07 64 En Chapter 7 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder. Important ⢠If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, you cannot control the second unit from this one. ⢠You canâÂÂt control this unit remotely from a component connected to the DV IN jack. Playing from a DV camcorder 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. 2 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like. See DV Input on page 109 for more on this. ⢠Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 108). 3 Select âÂÂDVâÂÂ, then âÂÂDV Video Playbackâ from the Home Menu. 4 Start playback on the camcorder. Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV. ⢠To record the incoming video, Use the HDD and DVD button to select the HDD or a DVD for recording, then press î REC . Press î STOP REC to finish recording. If there is no signal from the device connected to the DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a recordable signal. ⢠The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if the signal is interrupted during recording. ⢠If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 35 for more details. Recording from a DV camcorder ⢠The source signal must be DVC-SD format. ⢠You canâÂÂt record date and time information from DV cassette. ⢠During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will pause recording. Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is more than two minutes of blank tape, this recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder). Copying from a DV source Using the recorderâÂÂs remote, you can control both the camcorder and this recorder. Important ⢠Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorderâÂÂs remote. ⢠For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to play-pause. HOME MENU DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 65 En 07 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 Set the recording quality. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 37 for detailed information. 3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like. See DV Input on page 109 for more on this. ⢠Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 108). 4 Select âÂÂDVâÂÂ, then âÂÂCopy from a DV Sourceâ from the Home Menu. ⢠DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. 5 Select âÂÂRecord to Hard Disk Driveâ or âÂÂRecord to DVDâÂÂ. 6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. For best results, pause playback at the point from which you want to record. ⢠Depending on your camcorder, you can use this recorderâÂÂs remote to control the camcorder using the î , î , î , î , î , î and î buttons. 7 Select âÂÂStart RecâÂÂ. ⢠You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording. ⢠If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately. ⢠HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for example. ⢠If you donâÂÂt want to see the DV recording screen during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press again to display). ⢠While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button. DV Auto Copy DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the contents of a DV source to the HDD or a DVD. 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 Set the recording quality. ⢠See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 37 for detailed information. 3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require. See DV Input on page 109 for more on this. ⢠Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Dual Mono Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 108). 4 Select âÂÂDVâÂÂ, then âÂÂDV Auto Copyâ from the Home Menu. ⢠DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. REC MODE HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Start Rec Pause Rec Stop Rec SP (2h00m/DVD) 32h45m î Stop î Stop 1.02.22 Control with these buttons î î î î î îÂÂî Rem. HDD REC MODE HOME MENU DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder 07 66 En 5 Select âÂÂRecord to Hard Disk Driveâ or âÂÂRecord to DVDâÂÂ. The DV tape is rewound to the beginning. Once it is rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and copied to either the HDD or a DVD. ⢠If there is a gap of two minutes or more between recorded contents, the copying process is automatically stopped. ⢠Once copying is finished, the DV tape is automatically rewound. ⢠To cancel the copying process, press î STOP REC for more than three seconds. About automatic finalization If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized after copying is complete. ⢠You canâÂÂt customize the background for DVD-R/-RW or DVD R/ RW disc finalization. ⢠No title names are assigned. ⢠If you want to give the disc a name, please do so before you start the copy (see Input Disc Name on page 100). ⢠If a timer recording is scheduled to start, and in some other instances, the disc will not be finalized. Frequently Asked Questions â¢I canâÂÂt get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what youâÂÂre trying to record is not copy- protected. If it still doesnâÂÂt work, try switching off the camcorder then switch back on. ⢠ThereâÂÂs a picture, but no sound! Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on page 109) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 . 1 About DV Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394- 1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals. âÂÂi.LINKâ and the âÂÂi.LINKâ logo are trademarks. ⢠This recorder is only compatible with DV- format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible. ⢠You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time to this recorder. ⢠You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN jack. ⢠It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN jack. ⢠DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on page 109). ⢠Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz). ⢠Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source component pauses playback or plays an unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the source component, or the DV cable is disconnected. ⢠The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output functionality. ENTER Note 1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 108). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 67 En 08 Chapter 8 Editing Editing options The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types. *1 DVD-R/-RW only HDD DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD R/ RW DVD-R/-RW , DVD-RAM (VR mode) Original Play List Create (page 69) î Play (page 69) îÂÂî î î Erase (page 69) îÂÂî î î Edit > Title Name (page 70) îÂÂî î î Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 72) îÂÂî î î Edit > Erase Section (page 72) îÂÂî î Edit > Divide (page 73) îÂÂî Edit > Chapter Edit (page 73) îÂÂî î Edit > Set Genre (page 74) î Edit > Lock (page 75) îÂÂî î Edit > Move (page 75) î Edit > Combine (page 76) î Genre Name (page 76) î Multi-Mode (page 77) î Undo (page 77) îÂÂî *1 î *1 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 68 En The Disc Navigator screen The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) discs, DVD R/ RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video content on the internal hard disk drive. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. ⢠Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117. ⢠During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be played. 1 Select the HDD or DVD. 2 Display the Disc Navigator screen. Playback will automatically stop when you do this. ⢠The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu. ⢠Press to display the command menu panel. Use the îÂÂ/î and ENTER buttons to navigate the menus. ⢠When in the title list, press to display the previous/next page if there are more titles than can be displayed. ⢠Press to change the title information displayed in the title list. ⢠Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens. ⢠If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting Play List from the view options panel (press î , then select Play List from the view options, then Play List ). ⢠Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently recorded titles that havenâÂÂt yet been played. 3 Press to exit the Disc Navigator. Editing accuracy Some editing commands ask you whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy ( Video Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing ). Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use the high-speed copy function to make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise. The edit point you choose will only be accurate to within one-half to one second. On the other hand, these edit points will be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. HDD DVD DISC NAVIGA TOR Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain Recent first All Genres 10Titles 30h30m 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 HDD SP MENU View options panel Selected titl e Command menu pane l Title thumbnai lT i t le informatio n Title lis t Available recording tim e 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) PREV NEXT DISPLAY HDD DVD Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles 10Titles MENU Original 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Style 4 Titles PlayList Original DISC NAVIGA TOR DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 69 En 08 HDD genres The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize your HDD video content you can assign different genres to titles. There are 10 genres in total, including ten user-definable ones that you can name as you like. Create Play List only Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it. Before you can use this command, make sure that the Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the left. 1 Select âÂÂCreateâ from the command menu panel. 2 Select an original title to add to the Play List. Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as necessary to the Play List. Play Use this function to start playback of a title. 1 Highlight the title you want to play. 2 Select âÂÂPlayâ from the command menu panel. Playback of the title you selected starts. Erase Use this function to erase unwanted titles. When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW (Video mode) or DVD RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc. 1 Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD R, will not result in any more free space on the disc. DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Remain 0Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode 2h00m(1.0G) Play List Play Erase Edit Undo Create No title ENTER Note 1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD R/ RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers. DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 70 En 1 Highlight the title you want to erase. 2 Select âÂÂEraseâ from the command menu panel. 3 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. Tip ⢠You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER . Title Name You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD R/ RW discs. 1 Highlight the title you want to name (or rename). 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂTitle Nameâ from the command menu panel. 3 Input a name for the selected title. â¢A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the î REV SCAN / î FWD SCAN buttons to change the cursor position. ⢠Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( î PREV / î NEXT ). ⢠You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name below. ⢠For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. ⢠To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN . ENTER ENTER DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Divide Chapter Edit ENTER Input Title Name CAPS small OK Clear Space A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 71 En 08 Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown. If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button (for example a P and an R ), press î FWD SCAN to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters. *1 lower-case: ÿ; upper -case: àUsing a USB keyboard to enter a name (DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only) Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes entering names very quick and convenient. 1 When in USB keyboard input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in the lower-left of the screen. 2 Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys, use the following keys when entering names: Key Characters Key Characters 1 . , â ? ! â & 1 6 m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ 2 a b c 2 ä àá â ã æ ç 7 p q r s 7 $ ÿ/à*1 3 d e f 3 è é ë ê 8 t u v 8 ü ù û ú 4 g h i 4 î ï ì àá 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 ã 0 0 î [cursor back] î [cursor forward] îÂÂ/ î [change case] CLEAR [clear character] î <space> î [ï¬Ânish name input] ~ ( ) _ / : ; â ` ^ @ # â % ÃÂ¥ | = { } [ ] < > Note 1⢠ItâÂÂs possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See also Connecting a USB device on page 24 for more connection information. ⢠Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters. 2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will automatically switch to remote control input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode. Key Function Change the cursor position Select CAPS Select small Delete character at the current cursor position Delete the character at the previous cursor position Enter the name Exit the input screen îÂÂî F1 F2 delete back space enter esc DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 72 En Set Thumbnail You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in that title. 1 Highlight the title you want to change the thumbnail picture for. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂSet Thumbnailâ from the command menu panel. The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you can find the frame you want. 3 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set. You can also use the chapter and time search features (press PLAY MODE ), and the CM SKIP and CM BACK buttons. 4 Select âÂÂExitâ to return to the Edit screen. Erase Section Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. 1 Highlight the title containing the section you want to erase. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂErase Sectionâ from the command menu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. ⢠For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 68. 4 Highlight âÂÂFromâ then use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then press ENTER. The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker shows the start of the section. HDD DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit Set Thumbnail (HDD) î Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 00.00.09.15 Exit OK Exit OK HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER ENTER ! Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Erase Section (HDD) î Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP Exit From To 00.00.09.15 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 73 En 08 5 Highlight âÂÂToâ then, in the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER . After pressing ENTER , another marker indicates the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. ⢠When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds). Divide Play List only Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be recombined into one again. 1 Highlight the title you want to divide. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂDivideâ from the command menu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. ⢠For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 68. 4 Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the place you want to divide the title. 5 Press to divide the title at the current playback position. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. Chapter Edit When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing. 1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you want to edit. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂChapter Editâ from the command menu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. ENTER ENTER HDD DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER ! Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Divide Title (HDD) î Play Pause Rec. time 2h00m 10ÃÂ1 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP Cancel 00.00.09.15 Divide ENTER ENTER Ye s Divided titles cannot be combined. OK? No ! DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HDD ENTER ENTER ! Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 74 En ⢠For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 68. 4 Select the command you want: ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use the playback controls ( î , î , î , î , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter, then press ENTER . You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or 99 chapters per HDD title). ⢠Erase 1 /Move 2 â Erase or move chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER . Select whether you want to erase or move the chapter. Move command only: Select the destination for the chapter, and press ENTER . ⢠Combine 3 â Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER . 5 Select âÂÂExitâ to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. Set Genre Use this command to assign a genre to a title. 1 Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂSet Genreâ from the command menu panel. Note 1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. 2 VR mode Play List only. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) Rec. time 1âÂÂ1 î Play 0.00.00 12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 1h00m Chapters 5 Exit Erase/Move Combine Divide Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 002 003 005 004 001 Rec. time Chapter 1h00m 0h01m 12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP Exit Erase/Move Combine Divide Move Cancel Erase 3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 2 3 5 4 1 Rec. time 1h00m 12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP Exit Erase/Move Divide Combin e ENTER HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 75 En 08 3 Select a genre for the title. Lock Original only You can lock a title so that it canâÂÂt be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later. Important ⢠You canâÂÂt undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also canâÂÂt undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu. 1 Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock). 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂLockâ from the command menu panel. An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. Move Play List only Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles. 1 Highlight the title you want to move. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂMoveâ from the command menu panel. 3 Select a new position for the title. After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play List is displayed. ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle name Erase Section Edit Chapter Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Divide Free4 Free1 Free5 Free6 Free3 No Category Free2 HDD DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30 m Recent first HDD SP 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Set Genre Lock Chapter Edit DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 1 2 3 4 DVD VR Mode Play List 2h00m(1.0G) 1 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Move Combine Chapter Edit ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m Play List 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 1 3 4 MENU DVD VR Mode 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Insert position Title to mov e DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 76 En Combine Play List only Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one. 1 Highlight the title you want to combine. This title will remain in the same place after combining with another title. 2 Select âÂÂEditâ > âÂÂCombineâ from the command menu panel. 3 Select another title to combine with the first. This title will be appended to the first title selected. The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended to title 1. 4 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. Genre Name Use this command to rename one of the ten user-definable genres ( Free 1 to Free 10 ). 1 Select âÂÂGenre Nameâ from the command menu panel. 2 Select one of the user- definable genre names. 3 Input a name for the genre. ⢠The name can be up to 12 characters long. DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode Play List 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 2 1 3 4 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel T itle Name Erase Section Divide Cancel Set Thumbnail Move Combine Chapter Edit ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 4 Titles Remain 10Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode MENU Play List 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 1 2 1 3 4 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SAT 10:00PM 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) ENTER Ye s OK to combine titles 1 and 3 ? No ! HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m HDD SP Recent first 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Multi-Mode Genre Name Cancel Free1 Free2 Free3 Free4 Free 5 Free6 Free7 ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 77 En 08 ⢠For information on remote control key short cuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 71. 4 Select âÂÂOKâ to enter the name and exit. Multi-Mode Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at once, for example. 1 Select âÂÂMulti-Modeâ from the command menu panel. 2 Select titles from the title list. Selected titles are marked with a î . 3 Select the command that you want applied to all the marked titles. For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles. Once the command is completed, Multi- Mode is automatically exited. Undo If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you can only undo the last edit you made). ⢠Select âÂÂUndoâ from the command menu panel. ⢠You canâÂÂt undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. Input Genre Name CAPS small OK Clear Space Free 1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ; A A A A A A àç E E E E I I I I # 2 3 ô õ ö ÷ 1 ÿ ` D N O O O O O ø U U U U Y à$ % 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ & ã \ ç è é ì â î _ àâ / @ [ ÃÂ¥ ] à÷ x ñ { | } ~ á c a â o â << << 1 / 4 1 / 2 3 / 4 ø ENTER HDD ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Play Erase Edit Genre Name Multi-Mode ENTER ENTER Disc Navigator (HDD) 4 Titles Remain All Genres 10 Titles 30h30m Recent first HDD SP 1 9 8 7 10 12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP 12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 12/02 SA T 10:00PM 7ch SP 12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 1h00m(1.0G) 12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP 12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mod e Change Genre Lock Unlock Single Mode Erase DVD ( Video) DVD ( VR) DVD R DVD RW ENTER Disc Navigator (DVD) 11/29 MON 7:00PM 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 1 4 Titles Remain 0Titles 0h30m DVD VR Mode 2h00m(1.0G) Play List Play Erase Edit Create Undo No title DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Editing 08 78 En Frequently asked questions ⢠Why doesnâÂÂt the available recording time increase when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R? When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD R), the titles are no longer displayed, but the content remains on the disc. DVD-R/ R are write-once media; they canâÂÂt be erased or rewritten. â¢I canâÂÂt edit my disc! You may find that as the available recording time is reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no longer possible. This is because information about your edits requires a certain amount of disc space. As you edit, this information builds up, eventually preventing you from editing further. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 79 En 09 Chapter 9 Copying and backup Introduction Use the copying features of this recorder to: ⢠Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD. ⢠Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play in another player. ⢠Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing. ⢠Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy below for detailed instructions. For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 81 for detailed instructions. Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum copying times on page 119 for more on copying times. If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is always done in real-time. When real-time copying from the HDD to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers in the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) on page 112). Restrictions on copying Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD. Some video material is copy-once protected. This means that it can be recorded to HDD, but it canâÂÂt then be freely copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, youâÂÂll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM- compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on page 36 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and after itâÂÂs been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected). You can identify copy-once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark ( ! ) is shown. Copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. One Touch Copy * See also Copyright above. The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of where in the title you start the copy. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 09 80 En HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in whatever recording mode is currently set. Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when trying to copy from the HDD. 1 If youâÂÂre copying from DVD to the HDD, select a recording mode. Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title playing will not result in a better quality recording. 2 Press during playback to copy the current title. The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied. ⢠High-speed copying is used when copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying. ⢠Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the title. Cancelling One Touch Copy You can cancel a One Touch Copy once itâÂÂs started. ⢠Press and hold for more than a second. Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is erased. ⢠If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/ R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the pre-copy figure. Notes on copying using One Touch Copy Copying to DVD ⢠Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied. ⢠The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected. â¢A title that contains mixed aspect ratios canâÂÂt be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Use a DVD-R/ -RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. ⢠Low resolution ( SEP through LP modes 1 ) widescreen material canâÂÂt be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. ⢠When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP / MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high- speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM. ⢠Recordings of dual mono/bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM. ⢠XP titles cannot be copied to DVD via One Touch Copy. ⢠Titles over eight hours cannot be copied to single-layer DVD R/ RW discs using One Touch Copy. Use DVD R DL discs for titles over eight hours. ⢠Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD R/ RW using One Touch Copy. Copying to the HDD ⢠The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours. ⢠Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW. REC MODE ONE TOUCH COPY ONE TOUCH COPY Note 1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 81 En 09 ⢠Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original. ⢠If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied. Using Copy Lists * See also Copyright on page 79. At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list, erasing chapters you donâÂÂt need, or re- naming titles, for example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual video content; only the âÂÂvirtualâ content of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the actual content is not being altered. Copying from HDD to DVD Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. ⢠The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. ⢠The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System setting is changed (see Additional information about the TV system settings on page 117). ⢠Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 134) will erase the Copy List. 1 Load a recordable DVD. ⢠It is possible to complete the following steps without having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are slightly different. ⢠If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the copy, make sure it is initialized before you start. 2 Select âÂÂCopyâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂHDD î DVDâÂÂ. If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 5 below. 4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the recorder, choose whether to âÂÂCreate New Copy Listâ or âÂÂContinue Using Previous Copy ListâÂÂ. ⢠If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List , skip to step 10 below. ⢠Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder. 5 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add). Titles youâÂÂve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink. HOME MENU ENTER HDD DVD Disc Back-up DVD/CD HDD Continue Using Previous Copy List Create New Copy List ENTER Copy Select Title Recent first All Genres 8 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 0.0G 4.3G 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Back Nex t SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 7:00PM 2h00m(1.0G) 2ch Free1 HDD DVD (Video mode ) 1 > 2 > 3 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 09 82 En There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW: ⢠When adding titles that contain copy- once protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added. ⢠When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title if high-speed copying is possible. Depending on the title 1 , high-speed copying may not be possible to DVDs. 6 Press î to display the command menu panel. 7 Select âÂÂNextâ to move on to the Title Edit screen. 8 To edit a title, highlight it using the îÂÂ/î buttons, then press ENTER . A menu of editing commands appears: ⢠Erase â Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 69). ⢠Title Name â Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see Title Name on page 70). ⢠Erase Section â Erase part of a title (see Erase Section on page 72). ⢠Move â Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 75). ⢠Preview â Check the content of a title in the Copy List. ⢠Divide â Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see Divide on page 73). ⢠Combine â Combine two titles in the Copy List into one (see Combine on page 76). ⢠Chapter Edit â Edit chapters within a Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on page 73): ⢠Divide â Divide a chapter into two. ⢠Erase/Move â Erase a chapter/ Change the chapter order. ⢠Combine â Combine two chapters into one. Note 1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD R/ RW: ⢠Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP mode. The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD R/ RW: ⢠Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution ( SEP through LP / MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On)). ⢠LP / MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off. ⢠Dual mono/Bilingual recordings. ⢠Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes. The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD: ⢠XP titles. Copy Select Title Recent first All Genres 8 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 7:00PM 2h00m(1.0G) 2ch Free1 HDD DVD (Video mode ) 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next The Command Menu panel Copy T itle Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP HDD DVD (Video mode ) 1 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP Copy T itle Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) HDD DVD (Video mode ) 1 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP Erase T itle Name Erase Section Move Preview Cancel DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 83 En 09 ⢠Set Thumbnail â Set the thumbnail frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on page 72). ⢠Recording Mode â Set the picture quality of the copy (see Recording Mode on page 84). ⢠Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual â Set how dual mono/bilingual audio should be copied when copying from HDD to DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) and DVD R/ RW (see Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual on page 85). ⢠Cancel â Exit the menu. Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing. 9 Display the command menu panel. 10 Select âÂÂNextâ to proceed. There are several options available from the next screen: ⢠Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 84). ⢠Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc or DVD R/ RW. (The input method is similar to that of naming titles; see Title Name on page 70.) ⢠Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R after copying. 1 Select a title menu style from the following screen. 11 Select âÂÂStart Copyâ to start copying. ⢠If youâÂÂre using a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc and the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total bar will be purple. ⢠The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD R DL disc is already full. Copying from DVD to HDD Important ⢠The DVD to HDD Copy screen isnâÂÂt accessible when a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy function, however (See One Touch Copy on page 79). ⢠The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. ⢠The Copy List will be erased if: â any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited. â the disc tray is opened. â playback is switched between Play List and Original. â the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized. ENTER Copy T itle Edit 2 Title Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 1 2 4.3G 4.3G 1 > 2 > 3 Back Next 1h00m(2.0G) 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP HDD DVD (Video mode ) Note 1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized. ENTER Copy HDD DVD (Video Mode) Start Copy Copy Time 0 h 1 6m Recording Mode Disc Name Finalize Back Recording Mode Input Disc Name Finalize Start Copy Copy List T otal Current DVD Remain 4.3G 4.3G DVD-RW Video Mode HDD High-Speed Off 1 > 2 > 3 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 09 84 En â the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 134). ⢠It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC. 1 Select âÂÂCopyâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂDVD/CD î HDDâÂÂ. 3 Select a Copy List type. ⢠Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder. 4 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add). Titles youâÂÂve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink. 5 Select âÂÂNextâ from the command menu panel to proceed to the title edit screen. 6 Select a title to edit. A menu appears of Copy List editing commands: ⢠Erase â Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 69). ⢠Move â Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 75). ⢠Preview â Check the content of a title in the Copy List. ⢠Cancel â Exit the menu. Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing. 7 Select âÂÂNextâ from the command menu panel to proceed to the copy options screen. ⢠Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode below). 8 Select âÂÂStart Copyâ to start copying. Recording Mode 1 Select âÂÂRecording Modeâ from the command menu panel. 2 Select a recording mode for the copy. ⢠High-Speed Copy 1 â The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. ⢠XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP , SEP , MN 2 â The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.) If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting ( MN1 to MN32 3 , LPCM or XP 4 ) from the Recording Quality box that appears. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER Note 1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original. 2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) on page 112). 3 When copying to a DVD R/ RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available. 4 XP mode available only when copying to HDD. ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 85 En 09 ⢠Optimized 1,2 â The recording quality is automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-time. When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you wonâÂÂt be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual 1 Select the title containing the audio you want to change. 2 Select âÂÂDual Mono Audio/ Bilingualâ from the command menu panel. 3 Select a dual mono audio/ bilingual option. Using disc backup * See also Copyright on page 79. This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD R/ RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk drive 3 , then on to another recordable DVD disc. 1 Select âÂÂCopyâÂÂ, then âÂÂDisc backupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select a backup option. There are three backup options: ⢠Start new disc back-up â Start making a backup of a disc. ⢠Resume writing data â Record the backup data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD. ⢠Erase back-up data â Erase the backup data on the HDD. 3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of. You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs, finalized DVD R or DVD RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/DVD R DL discs). 4 Select âÂÂStartâÂÂ. ⢠To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY . Note 1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) on page 112). 2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always exactly fill a disc. 3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD. ENTER ENTER HOME MENU ENTER Start new disc back-up Resume writing data Erase back-up data No disc. Please load a disc to be backed-up. Start Cancel Disc Back-up ENTER Read from disc and save to HDD. Start reading? Start Cancel Disc Back-up DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Copying and backup 09 86 En ⢠You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. 5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD. * If youâÂÂre using a DVD-RW or DVD RW, the disc doesnâÂÂt have to be blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the backup process. You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup. ⢠If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot undo the finalization later. ⢠Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc youâÂÂre backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc. ⢠DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD R/ RW discs can only be backed up to DVD R/ RW discs. 6 Select âÂÂStartâ to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc. ⢠To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY . ⢠You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD RW disc you can re-initialize it in order to make it usable again â see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 50.) 7 After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc, you can select whether to make another backup of the same data or exit. ⢠Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another backup copy, return to step 6 above. 8 If you donâÂÂt need to keep the backup data on the HDD, you can delete it now. Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to). ⢠If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD, you can make backup copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu. Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive. Please eject the disc and load a recordable disc Start Cancel Disc Back-up Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive. The disc contents will be overwritten. OK to start? Start Cancel Disc Back-up Disc back-up finished. To make another back-up copy, please load a recordable disc. Start Cancel Disc Back-up The backed-up data is still on the HDD. Erasing it will increase the free space available. OK to Erase? Ye s No Disc Back-up DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 87 En 10 Chapter 10 Using the Jukebox The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorderâÂÂs HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/-RW/ -ROM, DVD, USB device or PC (USB function only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR-550H- S). Once on the HDD, you can name albums and tracks, assign them a genre, and set tracks that you donâÂÂt want to play to Jump. Copying music to the HDD The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD audio, WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. All tracks are copied from each CD/DVD as an album. 1 WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on page 91). Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order they appear on the CD/DVD. Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD disc. Important ⢠While copying, no other recorder operation is possible. ⢠When copying, scheduled timer recordings will not start until copying is complete. ⢠Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully. 1 Load the CD/DVD you want to copy to the HDD. 2 Select âÂÂCopyâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂDVD/CD to HDDâÂÂ. On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD or all WMA/MP3 files on the DVD are copied to the HDD. ⢠You can also start copying by starting playback of the CD/DVD and then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY . ⢠To cancel copying press ENTER . ⢠If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play. Copying files via USB ( DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) Connecting a regular USB device You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD. 1 Connect the USB device. 2 Select âÂÂJukeboxâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂListen to Music from USB DeviceâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂCopy Albumâ from the command menu panel. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to the HDD. Note 1⢠Up to 999 albums can be created in the Jukebox. If you copy via Connect PC, the total number of albums you are able to create may be less than 999 (for more information, see page 89). ⢠Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source. ⢠When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a brief pause in sound between tracks. HOME MENU ENTER HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 10 88 En ⢠Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be copied/displayed. Connect PC Using a USB connection, you can copy WMA and MP3 files from a PC to the HDD of this device. Operations carried out on the PC require Windows Media Player 10. Important ⢠If the PC you are using does not currently have Windows Media Player 10 installed, you must first install the program and make sure it functions correctly before connecting the USB cable and attempting to use the Connect PC function. ⢠For more information on Connect PC, see Using a PC on page 25. ⢠You cannot edit or delete albums from this device when it is connected to a PC via USB. If you wish to edit or delete albums via the Jukebox, you must first disconnect the USB cable. 1 Connect the PC via USB cable. The screen below is displayed. Choose âÂÂTake no actionâ and click âÂÂOKâÂÂ. *Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 10, the screen shown below may not be displayed. 2 Select âÂÂJukeboxâ from the Home Menu. 3 Select âÂÂConnect PCâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. 5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the device. If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import screen is automatically closed. To reopen it, you will have to repeat steps 2 through 4 . 'T ake no action' 'OK' HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Connect PC 000 Folders ( 000 error ) 000000 Files ( 000 error ) Standby Exit Number of copied folders Sta tus Number of files unable to be copied Number of copied files DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 89 En 10 6 Open Windows Media Player 10 on the PC. The device settings screen appears. Click âÂÂCancelâÂÂ. *Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 10, the screen shown below may not be displayed. From the PC, in Windows Media Player 10: 1. Click âÂÂLibraryâÂÂ. 2. Choose the artist, album or song you would like to copy, and press the right mouse button. 3. Click âÂÂAdd to Sync listâ (when choosing songs, click âÂÂAdd toâ then âÂÂSync listâÂÂ). 4. Click âÂÂStart SyncâÂÂ. This begins the synchronization process. When finished, the message âÂÂSynchronized to Deviceâ is displayed in Windows Media Player 10. For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows Media Player 10. ⢠To cancel the synchronization process while it is underway, press ENTER on the remote control. The Connect PC screen is closed. ⢠If synchronization fails, make sure that the Pioneer. HDD/DVD-Recorder device is selected at the synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 10, and try again. 7 When you have finished copying files, close Windows Media Player 10 on the PC. 8 Close the import screen on this device. ⢠If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after copying, the import screen is automatically closed. Note ⢠When using the sync function of Windows Media Player 10, music, artist and album folders are created as follows: 'Cancel' 'Start Sync' Connect PC 001 Folders ( 000 error ) 000003 Files ( 000 error ) Copying Exit Progress Bar ENTER Root Artist 1 Music Album 1 Album 2 Artist 2 Album 1 music1.mp3 music1.mp3 music2.mp3 music1.wma DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 10 90 En ⢠Folders containing no files are not displayed in the Jukebox (such as the above âÂÂArtist1â and âÂÂArtist2â folders), but do count toward the maximum of 999 folders allowed in Jukebox. ⢠Up to 999 tracks can be included in one album. Note that when there are many tracks contained in one album, it may take time to display and transfer these tracks. ⢠Albums and tracks with no set name that are transferred from CD/DVD/USB are displayed as âÂÂUnknownAlbumâ and âÂÂUnknownFileâ in Windows Media Player 10. ⢠Album and track names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may display differently in Windows Media Player 10 and the Jukebox. ⢠When albums are deleted in the Jukebox, their file hierarchy as displayed in Windows Media Player may change. ⢠File whose extensions are not supported by the Jukebox (i.e. files that are not .mp3 or .wma) cannot be transferred. ⢠Files imported to this recorder via Connect PC cannot be exported from this recorder. ⢠Note that no recording functions, including timer recordings, will be carried out when you are using the Connect PC function. Playing music from the Jukebox You can select albums or individual tracks from the Jukebox to play. 1 Select âÂÂJukeboxâ from the Home Menu. For DVR-450H-S, skip to step 3 . 2 Select a Jukebox option. ⢠Listen to Music/Edit â Listen to CDs or WMA/MP3 files that have been copied to the HDD. ⢠Listen to Music from USB device â Listen to music from an external USB device. 3 Select what you want to play. The screen below shows albums stored on the HDD: ⢠If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are not set to Jump will play. ⢠If you want to start playback from a selected track in an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press î to enter the track list then select a track to play. ⢠Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER HDD By number Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical T otal 12 70 MB 10Albums Jukebox 47.0 G Remain All Genres Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name 3-10 0.03.58 î 4 Album2 5 Album3 6 Album4 7 Album5 8 Album6 9 Album7 10 Album8 3 Album1 ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Album name Info for selected album Playback status HDD By number Jupiter classical MP3 8 MB 10Albums Jukebox 47.0 G Remain All Genres Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name 3-10 0.03.58 î 4 Album2 5 Album3 6 Album4 7 Album5 8 Album6 9 Album7 10 Album8 3 Album1 ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Mars Venus Mercury Jupiter Saturn Uranus Neptune T rack name DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the Jukebox 91 En 10 Changing the album view 1 From the album list, display the view options menu panel. 2 Select a view option. ⢠Sort order By number â Albums are listed by the album number. By favourite â Most often listened to music appears at the top of the list. By album â Albums are listed alphabetically. ⢠Genre All Genres â All albums are displayed. Genre â Only albums in the selected genre are displayed. Editing Jukebox albums A number of commands are available for editing and changing the playback behavior of albums. 1 Select âÂÂJukeboxâ from the Home Menu. For DVR-450H-S, skip to step 3 . 2 Select âÂÂListen to Music/EditâÂÂ. 3 Select what you want to edit. 4 Select an edit function from the command menu panel. ⢠Erase â Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an album are selected, the whole album is erased). ⢠Edit > Album name â Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the album. See page Title Name on page 70 for how to enter names. ⢠Edit > Track name â Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the track. See page Title Name on page 70 for how to enter names. ⢠Edit > Set Genre â Set or change the genre for the album. ⢠Edit > Jump Set 1 â Set a track to jump so that it doesnâÂÂt play (choose this command again to cancel the Jump setting). ⢠Play Mode â Change the playback order for albums and tracks. ⢠Genre Name â Enter a name of up to 12 characters for a genre. See page Title Name on page 70 for how to enter names. ENTER HDD By number Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical T otal 12 70 MB 10Albums Jukebox 47.0 G Remain All Genres Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name 3-10 0.03.58 î 4 Album2 5 Album3 6 Album4 7 Album5 8 Album6 9 Album7 10 Album8 3 Album1 ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Sort order Genre All Genres By number By number By favourite Cancel By album HDD By number Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical T otal 12 70 MB 10Albums Jukebox 47.0 G Remain All Genres Play Erase Edit Play Mode Genre Name 3-10 0.03.58 î 4 Album2 5 Album3 6 Album4 7 Album5 8 Album6 9 Album7 10 Album8 3 Album1 ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Sort order By number Genre All Genres All Genres No Category Jazz Classical Pop Rock Best Note 1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback. HOME MENU ENTER ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 11 92 En Chapter 11 The PhotoViewer From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped digital camera (USB function only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR- 550H-S). 1 You can also import files and save them to the recorderâÂÂs HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. Locating JPEG picture files 1 Select âÂÂPhotoViewerâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select the location of the files you want to view or edit. ⢠View/Edit Photos on the HDD â View or edit photos already stored on the recorderâÂÂs HDD. ⢠View Photos on a CD/DVD â View photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD- R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW. ⢠View Photos on a USB Device ( DVR- 650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) â View photos on a digital camera (or other USB device) connected to the USB port. ⢠Copy Files from a Digital Camera ( DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) â Copy all DCF files directly from a connected digital camera to a recordable DVD-R/ -RW. 3 Select the folder containing the files you want to view, copy or edit. The first image from the selected folder is displayed as thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. From the Folder Information column, you can change thumbnails via the î REV SCAN / î FWD SCAN buttons. Note 1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 94). HOME MENU ENTER View/Edit Photos on the HDD View Photos on a USB Device Copy Files from a Digital Camera View Photos on a CD/DVD ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Currently selected folder in folder list Folder informa tion Pages in fo lder list DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 93 En 11 4 Select the file you want to view, copy or edit. ⢠The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder to load the file. ⢠You can change folders via the î REV SCAN / î FWD SCAN buttons. ⢠If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created disc compatibility on page 11). ⢠The thumbnail of files that cannot be played is displayed as the logo. Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer You can choose to display photos by grouping them by folder, file, or number of thumbnails. 1 Display the View Options panel. 2 Choose âÂÂDisplay Modeâ or âÂÂStyleâ then press ENTER to see the available view options. ⢠Display Mode â Choose between folder and file display modes. ⢠Style â Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12 thumbnails. 3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. The display mode will change to that which you have chosen. Playing a slideshow 1 Select a folder from the folder list. To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing î . 2 Select a thumbnail. ⢠Use î PREV and î NEXT to display the previous/next page of thumbnails. 3 Select âÂÂStart Slideshowâ or âÂÂStart Audio Slideshowâ from the menu. When you select âÂÂStart Audio SlideshowâÂÂ, you are prompted to select the Genre of music you would like to hear, and when you press ENTER , music of that Genre stored on the Jukebox will be played during the slideshow. For more information on adding music to the HDD, see Using the Jukebox on page 87. ⢠You can also select a file or folder then press î PLAY to start playing the slideshow. ⢠Use î PREV/ î NEXT to display the previous/next picture, or î PAUSE to pause the slideshow. HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Currently selected thumbnail Pages in file list HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU File Style 12 Files Display Mode The View Options panel ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 11 94 En ⢠Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and right. ⢠Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. This is normal. 4 Press to return to the thumbnail. ⢠You can also use the RETURN button. 5 Press to exit the PhotoViewer. Zooming an image During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed. 1 Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 2 Use to move the zoomed area. Rotating an image You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken. ⢠Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90ú. Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90ú. Reloading files from a disc or USB device If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function. 1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list (âÂÂRead next: ...âÂÂ). 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc or connected USB device (USB function only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR- 550H-S). It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in the images. 1 Importing files to the HDD You can import files and save them to the HDD 2 from a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera (USB function only works with DVR- 650H-S and DVR-550H-S). Once on the HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print them out if youâÂÂve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer (USB function only works with DVR-650H-S and DVR- 550H-S). 1 Select the location of folders/ files you want to import. To import a whole folder, select the desired folder, press î , and skip to step 3 below. ⢠To import multiple folders, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 2 Select a file to import, then press î . . . . ⢠To import multiple files, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. STOP HOME MENU ENTER ANGLE Note 1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.) 2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW. ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 95 En 11 3 Select âÂÂCopy to HDDâ from the menu. 4 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm and copy the folder(s)/file(s), or â Noâ to cancel. ⢠The files will be copied to the HDD with the same folder structure as the original. ⢠Importing to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder). Selecting multiple files or folders The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files at once for importing or editing. 1 Select the folder containing the files you want to import. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂMulti-Modeâ from the menu. 4 Select files/folders from the list. An orange check mark box ( î ) is shown by the item you selected. A blue check mark box ( î ) appears on the folder select screen when files from that folder are selected. 5 Display the command menu. 6 Select the command you want to apply to all the selected items. ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer CD/DVD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Copy all to HDD Copy to HDD Print Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow New Folder Folder Options Copy to DVD Multi-Mode ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Multi-Mode ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 11 96 En Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW ( DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) Using this feature you can copy all the files 1 (including audio and movie files) stored on a connected USB camera to a recordable DVD disc. A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatically finalized. Important ⢠Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that has already been initialized for Video mode recording but has nothing yet recorded on it. Discs that have already been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot be used. ⢠After backing up the pictures in your digital camera to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been recorded properly before deleting anything from the camera. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPhotoViewerâ to display the PhotoViewer screen. 2 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. 3 Select âÂÂCopy Files from a Digital Cameraâ from the menu. 4 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. ⢠Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operations are possible. Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW This feature allows you just to copy some of the files stored on HDD to a DVD. A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD player (copying selected files doesnâÂÂt automatically finalize the disc). Important â¢A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded. ⢠One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files. If there are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple slideshows are created on the disc. ⢠If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the slideshow will become unplayable but the free space will not increase. 1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. 2 Select âÂÂView/Edit Photos on the HDDâ from the menu. 3 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. ⢠Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. Note 1⢠There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data you can copy at one time. ⢠Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW. View/Edit Photos on the HDD View Photos on a USB Device Copy Files from a Digital Camera View Photos on a CD/DVD ENTER ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 97 En 11 ⢠To copy multiple folders, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 4 Select âÂÂCopy to DVDâ from the menu. 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. ⢠Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR . File names will be PHOT number. ⢠Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operation is possible. ⢠While âÂÂCancelâ is displayed, you can press ENTER to cancel. Editing files on the HDD There are a number of commands you can use to edit and organize your pictures stored on the HDD. Creating a new folder 1 From the folder list, display the menu. 2 Select âÂÂNew FolderâÂÂ. The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the name F_ number . ⢠There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD. Erasing a file or folder 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to erase. ⢠To erase multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. ⢠Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it. Please be careful! ⢠You canâÂÂt erase files that have been locked. ⢠Folders containing locked files canâÂÂt be erased. Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂFile Optionsâ or âÂÂFolder OptionsâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂEraseâ or âÂÂErase FolderâÂÂ. ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD Folder 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 100.0 G Remain 1/3 PhotoViewer HDD 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 001 Folder1 Select Folder FOLDER MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow New Folder Folder Options Copy to DVD Multi-Mode ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 11 98 En 5 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. ⢠You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm. Copying files 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. ⢠Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. ⢠To copy multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂFile Optionsâ or âÂÂFolder OptionsâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂCopyâ or âÂÂCopy Folder ContentsâÂÂ. 5 Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s) to. 6 Select âÂÂYesâ to confirm, or âÂÂNoâ to cancel. ⢠Copying to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD. Naming files and folders 1 Select the file or folder you want to rename. You canâÂÂt rename files that have been locked. 2 Select âÂÂFile Optionsâ or âÂÂFolder OptionsâÂÂ. 3 Select âÂÂRename Fileâ or âÂÂRename FolderâÂÂ. 4 Enter a new name for the file/folder. File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters long. See Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name and Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 71 for how to enter a name. Locking/Unlocking files Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure and prevent them from being renamed. Use the same process to both lock and unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a padlock icon. ENTER ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The PhotoViewer 99 En 11 1 Select the file(s) you want to lock (or unlock). ⢠To lock/unlock multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂFile Optionsâ or âÂÂFolder OptionsâÂÂ. 4 Select âÂÂLockâ or âÂÂLock Folder ContentsâÂÂ. Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them. To remove all locks within a given folder, choose âÂÂFolder Optionâ > âÂÂUnlock Folder Contentsâ . To view detailed information This feature allows you to check the settings of the camera from which you imported the photos. 1 Choose the file for which you would like to see detailed information. 2 Choose âÂÂDetailed InformationâÂÂ. When no detailed information is available, nothing is displayed. Printing files ( DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S only ) Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB port will enable you to print out picture files 1 stored on the HDD, a CD/DVD or directly from a digital camera. Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder before starting. 1 Select the file(s) you want to print. ⢠To print multiple files, use the Multi- Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 95. 2 Display the command menu. 3 Select âÂÂPrintâ from the menu. 4 Select âÂÂStartâ to confirm, or âÂÂCancelâ to cancel. ⢠Once printing has started, you can cancel by pressing ENTER . Tip ⢠Paper size and layout can be set; the options available depend on your printer â check the printer manual for details. ⢠This recorder may not work correctly with all printers. ENTER ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode Erase Copy Rename File Lock Cancel Note 1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly. ENTER HDD File 001 PIOR0000 002 PIOR0001 003 PIOR0002 004 PIOR0003 005 PIOR0004 006 PIOR0005 007 PIOR0006 008 PIOR0007 009 PIOR0008 010 PIOR0009 011 PIOR0010 012 PIOR0011 100.0 G Remain 1/84 PhotoViewer HDD Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB 12 Files FILE MENU Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 99 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 12 100 En Chapter 12 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu. Basic settings Input Disc Name When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 . You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂBasicâ > âÂÂInput Disc Nameâ > âÂÂNext ScreenâÂÂ. 3 Input a name for the disc. The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD R/ RW. ⢠See Title Name on page 70 for more on navigating the input screen. Lock Disc ⢠Default setting: Off Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc. Important â¢A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂBasicâ > âÂÂLock Discâ then âÂÂOnâ or âÂÂOffâÂÂ. Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off . DVD-RW Auto Initialize ⢠Default setting: VR Mode Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 51 for detailed instructions. DVD ( VR) DVD ( Video) DVD R DVD RW DVD-RAM HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. Basic Input Disc Name Next Screen Input Disc Name ENTER DVD ( VR) DVD-RAM HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Input Disc Name Lock Disc DVD-RW Auto Init. Basic On Off Lock Disc DVD-RW DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 100 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 101 En 12 Initialize settings You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either VR mode or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see page 51). New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize them for VR mode recording. 1 DVD RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR mode. See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 50 for detailed instructions. Finalize settings Finalize Finalizing âÂÂfixesâ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. It is also possible to finalize DVD RW discs. This is only necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu for the disc. See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 49 for detailed instructions. Undo Finalize You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂFinalizeâ > âÂÂUndo Finalizeâ then âÂÂStartâÂÂ. Optimize HDD As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need optimizing to âÂÂclean upâ all the fragmented files. When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will automatically display a message recommending optimization. Important ⢠Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours. During optimization, playback and recording are not possible. ⢠Cancelling optimization mid-way does not undo the optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly optimized. Note 1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording. DVD-R DVD-RW DVD RW DVD-RAM DVD-R DVD-RW DVD R DVD RW DVD-RW HOME MENU ENTER HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 101 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Disc Setup menu 12 102 En 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂOptimize HDDâ then âÂÂStartâÂÂ. A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. If no actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself off. Initialize HDD When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it. 1 Select âÂÂDisc Setupâ from the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂInitialize HDDâ then âÂÂStartâÂÂ. HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Optimize HDD Optimize HDD Start Optimize HDD HDD HOME MENU ENTER Basic Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD Disc Setup Initialize HDD Optimize HDD Start Initialize HDD DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 102 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video Adjust menu 103 En 13 Chapter 13 The Video Adjust menu Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording. Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. Important ⢠Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown in this manual are for the Taiwan and Philippines model. Choosing a preset 1 With the recorder stopped, press to display the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂVideo AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Select a preset. ⢠Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs. ⢠Use the î PREV /î NEXT buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: ⢠Tuner â suitable for general TV broadcasts ⢠VCR â suitable for video cassettes ⢠DTV/LDP â suitable for digital broadcasts and Laserdiscs ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( Tuner , VCR or DTV/LDP ). Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Select the setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Detailed Settings 2ch T uner ENTER Detailed Settings 2ch Memory1 ENTER Memory1 3-D Y/C Motion Still PureCinma Prog. Motion Auto Motion Still 2ch Detail CNR YNR White AGC Off Max Off Off Max Max Off DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 103 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video Adjust menu 13 104 En ⢠Prog. Motion â Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. ⢠PureCinema â This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto , but try switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural. ⢠3-D Y/C â Adjusts the brightness/colour separation. ⢠YNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. ⢠CNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White AGC â Turn on for automatic white level adjustment. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level (525 Input Line System only). ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colours appear. 4 Adjust the currently selected setting. 5 Press to exit. You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs. Choosing a preset 1 With a disc playing (or paused), press to display the Home Menu. 2 Select âÂÂVideo AdjustâÂÂ. 3 Select a setting. There are six presets available: ⢠TV â suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs ⢠PDP â suitable for plasma display screens ⢠Professional â suitable for professional monitors ⢠Memory1 â user preset 1 ⢠Memory2 â user preset 2 ⢠Memory3 â user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( TV , PDP or Professional ). ENTER HOME MENU HOME MENU ENTER ENTER Detailed Settings TV DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 104 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Video Adjust menu 105 En 13 Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 Move the cursor down and select âÂÂDetailed SettingsâÂÂ. 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. You can adjust the following settings: ⢠Prog. Motion â Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.) ⢠PureCinema â This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2 , On or Off if the picture appears unnatural. ⢠YNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. ⢠BNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of flat colour, caused by MPEG compression). ⢠MNR â Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG compression). ⢠Sharpness â Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements in the picture. Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Detail â Adjusts how sharp edges appear. ⢠White Level â Adjusts the intensity of white. White Level is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Black Level â Adjusts the intensity of black. Black Level is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Black Setup â Corrects the standard reference black level. Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Gamma Correction â Adjusts the brightness of darker images. Gamma Correction is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Hue â Adjusts overall balance between red and green. Hue is ineffective for HDMI output. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how rich the colours appear. Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting. 5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit. Tip ⢠To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Detailed Settings Memory1 Memory1 YNR Motion Still PureCinma Prog. Motion Auto1 Off Max BNR MNR Max Max Off Off Sharpness Detail Fine Soft Fine Soft DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 105 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 106 En Chapter 14 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. ⢠Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial SetupâÂÂ. In the table below, the default option is marked with a â¢. Setting Options Explanation Basic Clock Setting Auto Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically . Manual ⢠If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set the time and date manually . Display Set preferences for time and date display format. The clock must be set in order to use timer recording. Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or P AL-60 recording from an external input. 625 System Use for standard P AL or SECAM recording. Taiwan and Philippines model: Default setting is 525 System . Other: Default setting is 625 System . See also About the input line system on page 117 for more information on this setting. Power Save (except Taiwan and Philippines model) On No antenna input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in standby . Off ⢠When the recorder is in standby , all signals arriving at the antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs. HELP Setting On ⢠Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. Off Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (P ress HELP on the remote to manually display the Help screen.) Setup Navigator Start Select to start the Setup Navigator . See also Switching on and setting up on page 30 . DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 106 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 107 En 14 T uner Auto Channel Setting (Taiwan and Philippines model) Antenna ⢠Select if you receive channels from an antenna. It takes a few moments for the auto tuning to complete. Cable Select if you receive channels via cable. It takes a few moments for the auto tuning to complete. Auto Channel Setting (Other) Next Screen P roceed to the next screen, select your countr y , then wait for automatic tuning to complete. The channel mapping screen should appear when the recorder is set up. P ress ENTER to exit this screen. Manual CH Setting Next Screen P roceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your countr y , then proceed to the manual channel setting screen: ⢠Change channel presets using the î PREV / î NEXT buttons. ⢠T o skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On . ⢠Set the CH System setting to match the channel system of your countr y or region ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). ⢠Set the Channel setting to the channel you want to assign to the current channel preset ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). ⢠T o manually ï¬Âne tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then adjust the Level setting. ⢠Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ) . ⢠The Name ï¬Âeld allows you to input a name of up to ï¬Âve characters for the current channel preset ( except Taiwan and Philippines model ). Channel Swapping (except Taiwan and Philippines model) Next Screen P roceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together . Select two presets to swap then press ENTER . G-Code CH Setting Next Screen P roceed to the next screen to assign channel numbers to the guide channels as necessar y . Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers should be assigned to which guide channels. P ress ENTER when your done to leave this screen. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 107 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 108 En Video In/Out Input Colour System Next Screen P roceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input and the built-in TV tuner . Use the CH /â buttons to change the preset. On the default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is P AL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or P AL -60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly . See also About the input colour system on page 117 for more information on this setting. Component Video Out Interlace ⢠Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video. Progressive Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if youâÂÂre not sure. ⢠If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive , you will not be able to see any picture at all . In this case, press î OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the î (Stop) button on the front panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 114 to the default setting). ⢠When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT . NTSC on P AL TV On NTSC discs will play correctly on P AL-only TVs. Off ⢠Use if your TV is already NTSC -compatible. Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 117 for related information. Audio In NICAM Select (except Taiwan and Philippines model) NICAM ⢠Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. Regular Audio R ecord the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (Y ou can still switch the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.) T uner Level (except Taiwan and Philippines model) Normal ⢠Standard setting. Compression Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion. External Audio Stereo ⢠Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo. Dual Mono/ Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack. When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or dual mono/bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 108 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 109 En 14 Dual Mono Recording (Taiwan and Philippines model) L ⢠Select to record the left channel of an external dual mono source when recording to DVD in Video mode, to HDD with HDD Recording F ormat set to V ideo Mode On, or in LPCM mode. R As above, but for right channel recording. When recording dual mono audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback. Bilingual Recording (Other) A/L ⢠Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD with HDD Recording F ormat set to Video Mode On , to DVD in Video mode or in LPCM mode, from an external source. B/R As above, but for right (B) channel recording. When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback. DV Input Stereo 1 ⢠Select to use the âÂÂliveâ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Stereo 2 Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Mix Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks. Audio Out Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital ⢠Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played. Dolby Digital î PCM Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesnâÂÂt have a Dolby Digital decoder . DTS Out On ⢠Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played. Off Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when your connected equipment doesnâÂÂt have a DTS decoder . In this case, use the analog audio outputs. 96 kHz PCM Out 96 kHz î 48 kHz ⢠Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected equipment doesnâÂÂt support 96 kHz sampling rate. 96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 109 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 110 En MPEG Out MPEG Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being played. MPEG î PCM ⢠Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesnâÂÂt have an MPEG audio decoder . Audio DRC On Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume. Off ⢠Switches off Audio DRC. Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital . Language OSD Language ⢠(Taiwan and Philippines model) Sets the language of the on-screen displays to Chinese. English ⢠(Other) Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on- screen displays. Audio Language Chinese ⢠(Taiwan and Philippines model) Sets the default audio language for DVD- Video playback to Chinese. English ⢠(Other) Sets the default audio language for DVD- Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVD- Video playback. Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 118. Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 110 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 111 En 14 Subtitle Language Chinese ⢠(Taiwan and Philippines model) Sets the default subtitle language for DVD- Video playback to Chinese. English ⢠(Other) Sets the default subtitle language for DVD- Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for DVD- Video playback. Other Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 118. Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference. Auto Language On ⢠On this setting: ⢠DVD- Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will play using that language, without subtitles. ⢠Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with subtitles. Off Select to play DVD- Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language preferences. For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language. DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle Language ⢠Sets the language of DVD- Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language. English Sets the language of DVD- Video menus to English. available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD- Video menus. Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 118. Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language. Subtitle Display On ⢠Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences. Off Select to switch off subtitle display . Assist Subtitle Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available. Some discs may override these settings. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 111 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 112 En Recording Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32 , LPCM and XP modes can be set. Off ⢠Just the standard recording modes ( XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP and SEP ) can be set. See also Manual recording modes on page 120 for detailed information on manual recording levels. Optimized Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to ï¬Ât on to the selected media if it will not ï¬Ât at the selected quality setting. If the recording will not ï¬Ât even at MN1 ( MN4 for DVD R/ RW), then the recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected. Off ⢠When a timer recording is set that wonâÂÂt ï¬Ât on to the selected media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible. Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. Set Thumbnail 0 seconds ⢠Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the ï¬Ârst frame of the title. 30 seconds Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title. 3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title. Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) On ⢠When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD, chapter marks are added at the black screen between commercials and main programming. When recording in DV , chapter marks can be changed by date/time. Off Automatic chapter marking is switched off . Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off . 10 minutes ⢠When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted ever y 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted ever y 15 minutes. This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs. Auto Chapter (DVD R/ RW) No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off . 10 minutes ⢠When recording in DVD R/ RW or in real-time copying, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted ever y 15 minutes. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 112 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 113 En 14 HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you donâÂÂt need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW . Video Mode On ⢠Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW as high-speed copy can be used. ⢠Taiwan and Philippines model: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a broadcast with a SAP channel. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Dual Mono Recording on page 109. ⢠Other: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 109. ⢠When the recording mode is set to XP , you cannot change HDD Recording Format. Playback TV Screen Size 4:3 (Letter Box) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format presentation for widescreen material. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presentation for widescreen material. 16:9 ⢠Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV . Y our TV settings determine how 4:3 material will look. Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override this setting. Still Picture Field P roduces a stable, generally shake-free image. Frame P roduces sharp image, but may be prone to shake. Auto ⢠Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image. Seamless Playback On Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit points. Off ⢠Y ou may notice momentar y interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Play List. This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 113 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 114 En Parental Lock Set Password In order to change the parental lock level or change the countr y/area code, set the password using this option. F rom the following screen, enter a four-digit number that will be your password. Change Password In order to change the password, ï¬Ârst enter your existing password and then a new one from the following screen. Change Level F rom the following screen, ï¬Ârst enter your password and then set a parental lock level. Country/Area Code F rom the following screen, ï¬Ârst enter your password and then set a countr y/area code. See Country/Area code list on page 131. Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 134. Angle Indicator On ⢠A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD- Video disc. Off Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing. HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) Screen Resolution 1920 x 1080p Constant 1920 x 1080p output. 1920 x 1080i Constant 1920 x 1080i output. 1280 x 720p Constant 1280 x 720p output. 720 x 576p (720 x 480p) Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input Line System to 525 System , video is output in 720 x 480p). 720 x 576i (720 x 480i) Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input Line System to 525 System , video is output in 720 x 480i). ⢠If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press î OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the î (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 108 to the default setting). ⢠If you have the Colour set to YCbCr 4:2:2 , you cannot select 720 x 576i (720 x 480i) . 4:3 Video Output Full Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio. Normal Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on each side. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 114 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 115 En 14 Colour RGB (0âÂÂ255) Use if colours are weak and black appears to â ï¬Âoatâ on the RGB (16âÂÂ235) setting. RGB (16âÂÂ235) Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the RGB (0âÂÂ255) setting. YCbCr 4:2:2 The video signal is output as a 10-bit Y CbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is the standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices. YCbCr 4:4:4 The video signal is output as a 8-bit Y CbCr 4:4:4 component signal. ⢠Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available. ⢠When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available. ⢠You cannot choose YCbCr 4:2:2 when the Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 576i (720 x 480i). Audio Output Auto ⢠Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal. However , depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMI- connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output. PCM All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS). Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio. This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected . HDMI Control On ⢠Enable the HDMI Control function. Select this option when connected to an HDMI Control-compatible P ioneer plasma display , AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.). Off Disable the HDMI Control function. Select this option when not connected to an HDMI Control-compatible component, or when connected to a component manufactured by a company other than P ioneer . ⢠For more information about HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 22. ⢠This setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device. ⢠For more information see Troubleshooting on page 126. Options On Screen Display On ⢠The recorder displays operation displays ( Stop , Play , etc.) on-screen. Off Switches off the on-screen operation displays. Front Panel Display On ⢠The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby . Off The front panel display is switched off in standby . Setting Options Explanation 14 Initial_Settings.fm 115 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 116 En Remote Control Mode Recorder 1âÂÂ3 (default: Recorder 1) If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID, press and hold RETURN then press 1 , 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a recorder with the same ID. DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder âÂÂs DivX registration code. See DivX video compatibility on page 10 and DivXî VOD content on page 11. Set Preview (HDD only) Quick Preview ⢠When in the Disc Navigator , the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally from the beginning.) Normal The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title. Options 2 USB (DVR-650H-S/ DVR-550H-S only) Restart USB Device If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder , tr y using this option to restart it. If the device still does not work properly tr y switching it off then back on, and/or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable. Conï¬Ârm Printer Use this option to conï¬Ârm the make and model of the printer connected to the recorder (does not work with all printers). HDD Sleep Mode Proceed P uts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound quality . When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load. The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions, including: ⢠Turning the power off and on again. ⢠Pressing the HDD/DVD button and choosing the HDD. ⢠When a timer recording begins. ⢠When you try and make any changes to system settings. Setting Options Explanation DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 116 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 117 En 14 Additional information about the TV system settings About the input line system This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input Colour System settings determine how the recorder treats incoming video signals from an external input or the built-in TV tuner. Please note the following points when changing the input line system: ⢠If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel î (Stop) button then pressing INPUT SELECT (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. ⢠When you switch the Input Line System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the î (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT buttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care. ⢠You canâÂÂt mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc. ⢠When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (page 117). About NTSC on PAL TV Depending on the Input Line System setting and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. About the input colour system The available options of the Input Colour System setting depend on the Input Line System setting. The tables below show the different options available. Input Line System NTSC on P AL TV Output when stopped 625 System Off PAL On PAL 525 System Off NTSC On PALâÂÂ60 Taiwan and Philippines model: Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System n/a Auto PAL SECAM 525 System 3.58 NTSC Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 117 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
The Initial Setup menu 14 118 En Additional information about component video output If you switch the Component Video Out setting to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and hold the î (Stop) button on the front panel, then press î OPEN/CLOSE . This will set the recorderâÂÂs video output back to Interlace . Selecting other languages for language options 1 Select âÂÂOtherâ from the language list. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 2 Select the language you want. ⢠Select by language name: Use the îÂÂ/î buttons to change the language. ⢠Select by code number: Press î then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 131 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes. Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model: Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System n/a Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 Other: Input Line System Built-in tuner External input 625 System Auto Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM 525 System 3.58 NTSC Auto 3.58 NTSC PALâÂÂ60 ENTER ENTER Basic T uner Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Playback Initial Setup OSD Audio Language Subtitle Language Auto Language DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display DVD Menu Language DVD Menu Language Language Number English 0 5 1 4 Language DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 118 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 119 En 15 Chapter 15 Additional information Minimum copying times The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video. Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. 1 Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility. Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. *1 Titles recorded on DVD R/ RW in SEP , SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied. Note 1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed). Rec mode SEP SLP EP LP SP XP DVD disc type 10 h 8 h 6 h 4 h 2 h 1 h DVD-R / 1x DVD-RW / 1x 1x 6 mins. 7.5 mins. 10 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. 60 mins. DVD-RW / 2x DVD-R DL DVD-RAM / 2x 2x 3 mins. 4 mins. 5 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. DVD R / 2.4x DVD RW / 2.4x DVD R DL 2.4x *1 *1 *1 6.3 mins. 12.5 mins. 25 mins. DVD-RAM / 3x DVD-RAM / 5x 3x 2 mins. 2.5 mins. 3.5 mins. 5 mins. 10 mins. 20 mins. DVD-R / 4x DVD-RW / 4x DVD R / 4x DVD RW / 4x 4x 1.5 mins. *1 2 mins. *1 2.5 mins. *1 4 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. DVD-R / 8x / 16x DVD R / 8x / 16x DVD-RW / 6x DVD RW / 8x 6x 1.25 mins. *1 1.6 mins. *1 2.2 mins. *1 3 mins. 5.5 mins. 11 mins. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 119 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 120 En Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording time on the HDD, see Specifications on page 135. *1 Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes. *2 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System. *3 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD R/ RW. *4 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD R/ RW. *5 XP mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode. Rec. time *1 Resolution *2 Level Single-Layer DVD: DVD-R/-RW DVD R/ RW DVD-RAM Dual-Layer DVD: DVD-R DL DVD R DL Video mode Off (HDD) VR mode (DVD-R/-RW) DVD-RAM VR mode (DVD-R DL) Video mode On (HDD) Video mode (DVD-R/-RW) DVD R/ RW Video mode (DVD-R DL) DVD R DL MN 1 *3,4 802 mins. 1440 mins. 352 x 240 / 352 x 288 352 x 240 / 352 x 288 MN 2 *3,4 720 mins. 1292 mins. MN 3 *3,4 SEP 600 mins. 1077 mins. MN 4 *4 SLP 480 mins. 861 mins. MN 5 *4 420 mins. 754 mins. MN 6 *4 EP 360 mins. 646 mins. MN 7 300 mins. 538 mins. 352 x 480 / 352 x 576 352 x 480 / 352 x 576 MN 8 270 mins. 484 mins. MN 9 LP 240 mins. 431 mins. 480 x 480 / 480 x 576 720 x 480 / 720 x 576 MN 10 230 mins. 413 mins. MN 11 220 mins. 395 mins. MN 12 210 mins. 377 mins. 544 x 480 / 544 x 576 MN 13 200 mins. 359 mins. MN 14 190 mins. 341 mins. MN 15 180 mins. 323 mins. MN 16 170 mins. 305 mins. 720 x 480 / 720 x 576 MN 17 160 mins. 287 mins. MN 18 150 mins. 269 mins. MN 19 140 mins. 251 mins. MN 20 130 mins. 233 mins. MN 21 SP 120 mins. 215 mins. MN 22 110 mins. 197 mins. MN 23 105 mins. 188 mins. MN 24 100 mins. 179 mins. MN 25 95 mins. 170 mins. MN 26 90 mins. 161 mins. MN 27 85 mins. 153 mins. MN 28 80 mins. 144 mins. MN 29 75 mins. 135 mins. MN 30 70 mins. 126 mins. MN 31 65 mins. 117 mins. MN 32 XP 61 mins. 111 mins. LPCM 61 mins. 111 mins. XP *5 --- mins. --- mins. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 120 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 121 En 15 ⢠Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. ⢠Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format. ⢠See also Recording on page 33. Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. General Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray ⢠Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label- side up). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 133). ⢠Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder . CanâÂÂt eject a disc ⢠T urn off the power to this device and press and hold î OPEN/CLOSE on the front of the unit for more than three seconds. CanâÂÂt play a disc ⢠Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 7). ⢠T ake out the disc and clean it (page 133). ⢠Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label- side up). ⢠P ress HDD/DVD to select the DVD. ⢠There may be condensation in the recorder . Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. ⢠During HDD recording, you canâÂÂt play discs that are recorded with a Line System different to the current recorder setting. ⢠DVD R/ RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy- once protected recordings will not play in this recorder . CanâÂÂt r ecord a disc ⢠Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7). ⢠Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 50). This can take up to an hour . No picture ⢠Check that ever ything is connected properly (page 14). ⢠Check that the connected TV and/or the A V amp/receiver is set to the correct input. ⢠The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV . Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel î (Stop) button then pressing î OPEN/CLOSE . ⢠When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT . DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 121 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 122 En All settings are r eset ⢠If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. ⢠Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord. Remote control does not work ⢠If you connected this recorder to another P ioneer product using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 14). ⢠Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 116). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1 .) ⢠Use the remote within its operating range (page 6). ⢠Replace the batteries (page 6). No sound or sound is distorted ⢠Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. ⢠There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play . P ress î PLAY to resume regular playback. ⢠DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver . If you have connected a suitable decoder , also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Out setting is On . ⢠Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog. ⢠Check the audio cable connections (page 14). ⢠If the sound is distorted, tr y cleaning the cable plugs. Cannot switch a dual mono/bilingual programme ⢠During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub channels are both output. The picture is distorted ⢠Change the Input Line System setting (page 117). (Y ou can also change it by pressing the î (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.) The picture fr om the external input is distorted ⢠If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder . Connect the component directly to your TV . Screen is str etched vertically or horizontally ⢠Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 113) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 132). ⢠If you have a widescreen TV , check its aspect ratio settings. ⢠This recorder âÂÂs input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. Problem Remedy DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 122 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 123 En 15 CanâÂÂt play a disc recor ded using this recor der on another player ⢠If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R , make sure that itâÂÂs ï¬Ânalized (page 49). ⢠Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R and ï¬Ânalized. ⢠If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be speciï¬Âcally RW compatible in order to play it (page 7). ⢠Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non- CPRM compatible players (page 35). ⢠DVD RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again. During playback the picture is dark or distorted ⢠When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR , the picture will not display correctly . Connect the recorder directly to your TV . Recorded contents ar e not clear or artefacts appear in areas of ï¬Âat colour (due to MPEG compression; also known as block noise ) ⢠Change the recording mode to XP / SP . CanâÂÂt r ecord or does not recor d successfully ⢠Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD. ⢠F or a DVD -R/-RW (V ideo mode) or DVD R, check that the disc isn âÂÂt already ï¬Ânalized. ⢠Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc: â HDD: 999 titles â VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc â Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title â DVD R/ RW : 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc) ⢠Check that the source you are tr ying to record is not copy protected. ⢠F or a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isnâÂÂt locked (page 100). ⢠Check that you are recording with the same TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessar y to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 117). ⢠The power may have failed during recording. Timer programme doesnâÂÂt r ecord successfully ⢠When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder âÂÂs built-in TV tuner , not the TV âÂÂs built-in tuner . ⢠When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD R/ RW , programmes that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 35). ⢠T wo timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely . ⢠The power may have failed during recording. ⢠Check that the recorder âÂÂs TV system (P AL, NTSC, etc.) settings are the same as the channel set for recording. Problem Remedy DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 123 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 124 En After brieï¬Ây unplugging or after a power failure the fr ont panel display shows âÂÂ--:--â â¢ A backup batter y inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder . Af ter unplugging or a power failure, the batter y keeps all settings for some ï¬Âve years from the date it was shipped from the factor y . Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. ⢠T o have the batter y replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneer - authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. Front panel display shows âÂÂLOCKEDâ when a button is pressed ⢠The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 46). CanâÂÂt use One T ouch Copy (HDD to DVD) ⢠Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or a DVD R , the disc isnâÂÂt ï¬Ânalized. ⢠Make sure there is a recordable DVD R/ RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc. ⢠If you delete a title from a DVD R/ RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles may not decrease. ⢠F urther recording is not possible on a ï¬Ânalized DVD R . Check that there isnâÂÂt a disc menu on the disc youâÂÂre trying to use. ⢠If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One T ouch Copy will not work. ⢠If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP mode, the One T ouch Copy feature canâÂÂt be used. ⢠One T ouch Copy canâÂÂt be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD R/ RW (though you can use a DVD R DL). ⢠One T ouch Copy canâÂÂt be used for MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP titles when copying to DVD R/ RW . ⢠One T ouch Copy doesnâÂÂt work if the recorder is already recording to DVD. CanâÂÂt use One T ouch Copy (DVD to HDD) ⢠Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD. ⢠One T ouch Copy doesnâÂÂt work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD. The device connected to the USB port is not recognized (DVR-650H-S/ DVR-550H-S only) ⢠Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 24). ⢠Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length. ⢠Check that the USB cable is inserted fully . ⢠Check that the USB device is powered on. ⢠T r y switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on. ⢠T r y using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu (page 116). ⢠If several USB devices (camera, USB memor y , card reader , etc.) are connected at the same time, itâÂÂs possible that only the ï¬Ârst device connected to this recorder will be recognized. File names are not displayed properly . ⢠Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on this unit. Problem Remedy 15 Additional_Information.fm 124 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 125 En 15 HDMI Problem Remedy The connected HDMI or DVI device does not display any picture (and the front panel HDMI indicator does not light) ⢠T r y disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components is on). ⢠T r y switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on. ⢠T r y switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder . Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder . ⢠When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following: â The connected deviceâÂÂs video input is set correctly for this unit. â The cable youâÂÂre using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non- standard cable may result in no picture being output. â DonâÂÂt use several HDMI cables connected together . Use a single cable to connect devices together . ⢠When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following: â The connected deviceâÂÂs video input is set correctly for this unit. â The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP -compatible. â The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and P AL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input. ⢠If the recorder âÂÂs internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output. ⢠Not all HDCP -compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder . No video from the HDMI output ⢠If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press î OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the î (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 108 to the default setting). Thereâ s no sound fr om the connected HDMI or DVI device ⢠There is no sound when using a DVI terminal. ⢠Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came with the connected device). The power automatically turns on ⢠This unitâÂÂs power may be turned on each time you turn on the power for a connected plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be turned on in this way , set this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control to OFF (page 115). CanâÂÂt r ecord video ⢠When using HDMI Control to record, you must make sure that the channel information for the plasma television matches that of this unit. If the channel information does not match you cannot make recordings. Use the Auto Channel Setting function to set this unitâÂÂs channel information (page 107). DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 125 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 126 En If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working ⢠Press î (Stop) then try restarting playback. ⢠Press the front panel î STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold î STANDBY/ON for five seconds until the power switches off. HDMI Control does not respond ⢠V erify that the HDMI cable is ï¬Ârmly connected (page 21). ⢠Make sure that this unitâÂÂs HDMI Control is set to ON (page 115). ⢠Make sure that the connected componentâÂÂs HDMI Control is set to ON. F or more information, refer to the operating manual of your plasma television or AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.). ⢠This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders connected to a single plasma television or AV system. F or more information refer to the operating manual of your plasma television or AV system. ⢠Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, change connection settings, turn this unitâÂÂs power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected component. If you experience any problems, turn the HDMI control for all connected units ON and check the video output from this unit. ⢠Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or not. ⢠Certain functions are not supported on with plasma televisions. ⢠W e cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Control- compatible components other than those made by P ioneer . When using HDMI-Control compatible components manufactured by companies other than P ioneer , set the HDMI Control to Off (page 115). ⢠This unit will not function properly with AV systems that do not support HDMI Control, or when connected with AV systems other than those made by P ioneer . Problem Remedy HDD/DVD DivX COPY OPEN/CLOSE STANDBY/ON USB DV IN CH INPUT SELECT STOP REC ST ANDBY/ON DVR-650H-S/DVR-550H-S DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 126 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 127 En 15 On-screen displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. Message Explanation/Action ⢠Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it. ⢠Incompatible region number . The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play . ⢠Cannot recor d any more titles. ⢠No more space for ï¬Âle management data. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine chapters. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. Undo the ï¬Ânalization. The disc was ï¬Ânalized on a non-P ioneer DVD recorder . Undo the ï¬Ânalization in order to recording/editing. ⢠Cannot play this disc. ⢠This disc cannot be recor ded. ⢠Cannot read the CPRM information. ⢠Could not recor d the information to the disc. ⢠Cannot edit. ⢠Could not initialize disc. ⢠Could not complete ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not undo ï¬Ânalization successfully . ⢠Could not successfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. T ake out the disc, clean it and retr y . If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. ⢠Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. ⢠Cannot recor d to a disc that is not CPRM compatible. ⢠Cannot recor d this content using Video mode recor ding. ⢠This video cannot be recor ded to DVD R/ RW . The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording. ⢠This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. ⢠Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damaged â please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 127 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 128 En ⢠Repairing disc. ⢠Repairing the HDD. During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored. ⢠Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost. ⢠Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLA Y to clear message. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest P ioneer- authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. ⢠HDD optimization is recommended. This can be done using Disc Setup. The HDD should be optimized (basically , HDD housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording per formance. ⢠Please perform HDD optimization. This can be done using Disc Setup. The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain per formance. ⢠The HDD has not been sufï¬Âciently optimized. Please optimize again. If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization to complete properly . Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize again. ⢠An error occurr ed. Please consult the service center . Note that contents on the HDD may be erased when servicing this unit . . . . This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. ⢠The Hard Disk Drive info is incorr ect. Use the Disc Setup menu to reinitialize. As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 102) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected ï¬Âles. ⢠There is no DV input or the input signal is unrecor dable. No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder . ⢠No DV camcorder connected. The camcorder is not connected properly , or the camcorder is switched off . ⢠Y ou cannot connect mor e than one DV camcorder at a time. This recorder âÂÂs DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder . ⢠Cannot operate the DV camcorder . This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder . Tr y switching off the camcorder then turn it back on again. Message Explanation/Action DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 128 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 129 En 15 Front-panel displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. ⢠Could not operate the DV camcorder . This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder . ⢠The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder . The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode. ⢠The printer is not ready or is not connected. Please check the printer . This message is displayed when communication could not be established with the printer . See the Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause. ⢠Printing has been cancelled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error , either reconnect the printer and start the printing job again , or select âÂÂY esâ to resume printing (select âÂÂNoâ to cancel the print job). See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of print errors. Message Explanation/Action ⢠E01 The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest P ioneer-authorized ser vice center or your dealer to carr y out repairs. ⢠E02 As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 102) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected ï¬Âles. Message Explanation/Action 15 Additional_Information.fm 129 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 130 En Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. The LED indicator on the remote controls lights. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. ⢠If the makerâÂÂs name of your TV doesnâÂÂt appear in the table below, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2 Press î TV to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/off. If it doesnâÂÂt and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does î TV P ress to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT P ress to change the TV âÂÂs video input TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels Maker Code Alba 66 Bush 76 Fisher 61, 65 F ujitsu 77 F unai 67 Goldstar 79 Grandiente 87 Grundig 51, 82 Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86 IT T 70 Mitsubishi 59 Nokia 53, 81 P anasonic 58, 72 Philips 57, 85, 89 P ioneer 50, 80 RCA 68 Salora 71 Samsung 73, 75 Sanyo 74 Sei 78 Sharp 52 Sony 54 T andy 69 T elefunken 64 Thomson 62, 89 T oshiba 55 JVC 63 DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 130 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 131 En 15 Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code , Code letter Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Greek (el), 0512 Polish (pl), 1612 Czech (cs), 0319 Norwegian (no), 1415 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Korean (ko), 1115 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laotian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 131 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 132 En Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the programme are cropped so that the picture ï¬Âlls the whole screen. 4:3 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The programme is presented correctly on either setting. When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The programme is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Y our TV will determine how the picture is presented â check the manual that came with the TV for details. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 132 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 133 En 15 Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a circular motion. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When youâÂÂre not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). DonâÂÂt glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the recorder. Damaged discs Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, donâÂÂt risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder. This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Cleaning the pickup lens The HDD/DVD recorderâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 133 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 134 En Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference â especially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth â this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Moving the recorder If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press î STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording â discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold î (Stop) and press î STANDBY/ ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 134 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 135 En 15 Specifications General Power requirements Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption DVR-650H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 W DVR-550H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 W DVR-450H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 W Power consumption in standby mode (Front panel display: off) Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.51 W Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.33 W Weight DVR-650H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 kg DVR-550H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 kg DVR-450H-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 75 mm (H) x 288 mm (D) Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ðC to 35 ðC Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) TV system Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC Readable discs DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX) Recording discs and formats DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode DVD R/ RW: VR mode DVD-RAM: VR mode DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode DVD R DL: VR mode Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time HDD DVR-650H-S (250 GB) XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h to 711 h DVR-550H-S (160 GB) XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 h Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 h to 455 h DVR-450H-S (80 GB) XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 11 h Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 170 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 11 h to 227 h DVD-R/-RW, DVD R/ RW, DVD-RAM Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h (DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 13 h DVD R/ RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 8 h DVD-R DL/DVD R DL Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m (DVD-R DL only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h DVD R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m Timer Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes Clock Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (12-hour digital display 1 ) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display) Note 1 If the country is set to Philippines the clock switches to 24 hour display. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 135 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 15 136 En Tuner Receivable channels Taiwan and Philippines model: VHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ch to 13 ch UHF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ch to 69 ch CATV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 ch to C125 ch Australia, New Zealand and other Oceania area model : Taiwan, Philippines model : Other: Input/Output VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 ⦠(F-shape connector) Other . . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 ⦠(IEC connector) Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack Video Output 1, 2 Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jack S-Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (colour) - Input level Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN S-Video Output 1, 2 Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) C (colour) - Output level Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin mini DIN Component video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 ⦠) P B , P R : 0.7 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Audio Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) L/R During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms (Input impedance: more than 22 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Audio Output 1, 2 L/R During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms (Output impedance: less than 1.5 k ⦠) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks Other connections Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front) (i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard) USB (DVR-650H-S and DVR-550H-S only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front) HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin Supplied accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Operating Instructions Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF Channel E2 to E4 X to Z E5 to E12 S1 to S20 M1 to M10 U1 to U10 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequency 47 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz Channel A to C X to Z D to J 11, 13 S1 to S20 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequency 44 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM B/G P AL B/G PA L I Channel R1 â R5 R6 â R12 S1 â S20 S21 â S41 E21 â E69 Frequency 49 MHz to 94 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM D/K P AL D/K VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM Channel 2 to 13 14 to 69 C1 to C125 Frequency 55 MHz to 218 MHz 471 MHz to 808 MHz 72 MHz to 806 MHz NTSC-M/N STEREO M/N - BTSC VHF UHF CA TV VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF Channel E2 to E4 X to Z E5 to E12 S1 to S20 M1 to M10 U1 to U10 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequency 47 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz Channel A to C X to Z D to J 11, 13 S1 to S20 S21 to S41 E21 to E69 Frequency 44 MHz to 89 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM B/G P AL B/G PA L I Channel 2 to 13 14 to 69 C1 to C125 Frequency 55 MHz to 218 MHz 471 MHz to 808 MHz 72 MHz to 806 MHz NTSC-M/N Channel R1 â R5 R6 â R12 S1 â S20 S21 â S41 E21 â E69 Frequency 49 MHz to 94 MHz 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz 470 MHz to 862 MHz SECAM D/K P AL D/K STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM M/N - BTSC VHF UHF CA TV VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper UHF This product includes F ontAvenue î fonts licenced by NEC Corporation. F ontA venue is a r egistered trademark of NEC Corporation. DVR650HS_TLT_EN.book 136 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂç«æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<VRB1463-A> Pr inted in China HDD/DVD Recorder DVR-650H-S DVR-550H-S DVR-450H-S Operating Instructions HDD/D VD RECORDER Operating Instructions P ublished by Pioneer Corporation . Copyright é 2007 P ioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_B_En TM 00 Cover_back_TLTFWPW_EN.fm 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ